Anda di halaman 1dari 294

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS

Hardware Installation Guide

Extreme Networks, Inc.


3585 Monroe Street
Santa Clara, California 95051
(408) 579-2800
(888) 257-3000
http://www.extremenetworks.com

Published: March 2006


Part number: 100172-00 Rev. 04
Alpine, Altitude, BlackDiamond, EPICenter, Ethernet Everywhere, Extreme Ethernet Everywhere, Extreme
Networks, Extreme Turbodrive, Extreme Velocity, ExtremeWare, ExtremeWorks, ExtremeXOS, GlobalPx Content
Director, the Go Purple Extreme Solution Partners Logo, ServiceWatch, Summit, the Summit7i Logo, and the Color
Purple, among others, are trademarks or registered trademarks of Extreme Networks, Inc. or its subsidiaries in the
United States and other countries. Other names and marks may be the property of their respective owners.
© 2006 Extreme Networks, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
For safety compliance information, see Appendix A.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 2


Table of Contents

Preface......................................................................................................................................... 11
Introduction .............................................................................................................................11
Conventions..............................................................................................................................12
Related Publications .................................................................................................................12

Part 1: Site Preparation


Chapter 1: Site Preparation............................................................................................................ 17
Planning Your Site ....................................................................................................................18
Step 1: Meeting Site Requirements.......................................................................................18
Step 2: Evaluating and Meeting Cable Requirements ..............................................................18
Step 3: Meeting Power Requirements....................................................................................18
Meeting Site Requirements ........................................................................................................18
Operating Environment Requirements ...................................................................................19
Building and Electrical Codes.........................................................................................19
Wiring Closet Considerations ..........................................................................................20
Temperature .................................................................................................................20
BlackDiamond Chassis Spacing Requirements .................................................................21
Summit X450 Switch Spacing Requirements ...................................................................21
BlackDiamond Chassis Airflow Requirements ...................................................................21
Summit X450 Switch Spacing Requirements ...................................................................23
Electrostatic Discharge ..................................................................................................23
Humidity ......................................................................................................................23
Rack Specifications and Recommendations ...........................................................................24
Mechanical Recommendations for the Rack .....................................................................24
Protective Grounding for the Rack...................................................................................24
Space Requirements for the Rack ...................................................................................25
Securing the Rack .........................................................................................................25
Evaluating and Meeting Cable Requirements ...............................................................................26
Cabling Standards ...............................................................................................................26
Cable Labeling and Record Keeping ......................................................................................26
Installing Cable...................................................................................................................27
Fiber Optic Cable ..........................................................................................................29
Cable Distances ............................................................................................................29
RJ-45 Connector Jackets .....................................................................................................30
Radio Frequency Interference...............................................................................................31
Making Network Interface Cable Connections.........................................................................31
Meeting Power Requirements .....................................................................................................32
LAN Systems ......................................................................................................................32
Power Supply Requirements.................................................................................................32
PoE Devices .......................................................................................................................33
AC Power Cable Requirements..............................................................................................33
Replacing the Power Cable.............................................................................................33
Uninterruptible Power Supply Requirements ..........................................................................33
UPS Features................................................................................................................34

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 3


Table of Contents

Selecting a UPS ............................................................................................................34


Calculating Amperage Requirements ...............................................................................34
UPS Transition Time .....................................................................................................34
Applicable Industry Standards....................................................................................................35

Chapter 2: Initial Management Access ........................................................................................... 37


Connecting Equipment to the Console Port ..................................................................................37
Logging In for the First Time ......................................................................................................39

Part 2: Common Characteristics of the BlackDiamond Switches


Chapter 3: BlackDiamond Overview, Optics, and More..................................................................... 43
Supported Features ...................................................................................................................43
Full-Duplex Support ..................................................................................................................44
Management Ports ....................................................................................................................44
Mini-GBIC Interfaces .................................................................................................................44
Mini-GBIC Types and Specifications .....................................................................................44
Preparing to Install or Replace a Mini-GBIC ...........................................................................48
Installing and Removing a Mini-GBIC ....................................................................................48
Troubleshooting Mini-GBIC Port Status LEDs on the BlackDiamond 10800 Switches and the Sum-
mit X450 Switch .................................................................................................................49
XENPAK Interfaces ...................................................................................................................50
XENPAK Types and Specifications ........................................................................................50
Installing and Removing a XENPAK Module ...........................................................................54
External Compact Flash Memory Card .........................................................................................56
Supported External Compact Flash Memory Cards ..................................................................56
Installing an External Compact Flash Memory Card.................................................................56
Removing an External Memory Card ......................................................................................57

Chapter 4: Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC Power Supply Units .................................................. 59


Overview ..................................................................................................................................59
Pre-Installation Requirements ....................................................................................................59
Installing an Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU ..................................................................60
Removing an Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU..................................................................62
Specifications...........................................................................................................................62
Front Panel.........................................................................................................................63
Power Supply Cords.............................................................................................................64
Fuse ..................................................................................................................................64
Operating Conditions ...........................................................................................................65

Chapter 5: Extreme Networks 1200 W DC Power Supply Units ......................................................... 67


Overview ..................................................................................................................................67
Safety Information ....................................................................................................................67
Minimum Software Required ......................................................................................................68
Pre-Installation Requirements ....................................................................................................68
Installing the DC Wiring.............................................................................................................68
Installing an Extreme Networks 1200 W DC PSU .........................................................................69
Removing an Extreme Networks 1200 W DC PSU ........................................................................72

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 4


Table of Contents

Specifications...........................................................................................................................73
Front Panel.........................................................................................................................73
Operating Conditions ...........................................................................................................74

Chapter 6: BlackDiamond Cable Management ................................................................................. 75


Overview ..................................................................................................................................75
Using the Cable Clips and Cable Holders .....................................................................................76
Using Both Cable Holders and Cable Clips.............................................................................76
Connecting the Cable Holders or Cable Clips..........................................................................76

Part 3: BlackDiamond 8800 Series of Switches


Chapter 7: BlackDiamond 8806 Chassis ......................................................................................... 81
Safety Information ....................................................................................................................81
Minimum Software Required ......................................................................................................81
Physical Identification .........................................................................................................81
Instructions ........................................................................................................................82
For Customers Upgrading from 11.2 to 11.3....................................................................82
For Customers Upgrading from 11.1 to 11.3....................................................................82
BlackDiamond 8806 Architecture...............................................................................................87
BlackDiamond 8806 Chassis Front View .....................................................................................88
BlackDiamond 8806 Chassis Rear View ......................................................................................89
Additional BlackDiamond 8806 Chassis Information ....................................................................89

Chapter 8: BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis ......................................................................................... 91


BlackDiamond 8810 Architecture...............................................................................................91
Safety Information ....................................................................................................................91
BlackDiamond 8810 Family Chassis Front View ...........................................................................92
BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis Rear View ......................................................................................93
Uncrating and Unpacking the BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis ..........................................................93
Pre-Installation Requirements ....................................................................................................96
Assembling the BlackDiamond 8810 Mid-Mount Kit ....................................................................97
Rack Mounting the BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis .........................................................................98
Recrating and Repacking the BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis .........................................................100

Chapter 9: BlackDiamond 8800 MSM and I/O Modules.................................................................. 103


Management Switch Module (MSM)..........................................................................................103
Overview...........................................................................................................................103
Slots for BlackDiamond 8800 MSMs ..................................................................................105
Data Ports on the G8X MSM...............................................................................................105
MSM Activity ....................................................................................................................105
MSM LEDs .............................................................................................................................106
I/O Modules............................................................................................................................107
G24X Module ...................................................................................................................107
G24X LEDs.................................................................................................................108
10G4X Module .................................................................................................................108
10G4X LEDs...............................................................................................................109
G48T Module ...................................................................................................................109

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 5


Table of Contents

G48T LEDs.................................................................................................................109
G48P Module ...................................................................................................................110
G48P LEDs.................................................................................................................110
I/O Module LEDs.....................................................................................................................111
Module LEDs ....................................................................................................................111
Port LEDs.........................................................................................................................111
G24X, 10G4X, and G48T Port LEDs..............................................................................111
G48P Port LEDs..........................................................................................................111
Installing MSM and I/O Modules in the BlackDiamond 8800 Series of Switches ...........................112
Pre-Installation Requirements ............................................................................................112
Distinguishing a BlackDiamond 8800 MSM from an I/O Module ............................................113
Installing an MSM or I/O Module in the BlackDiamond 8800 Series of Switches .....................114
Removing an MSM or I/O Module from the BlackDiamond 8800 Series of Switches.................116
BlackDiamond 8800/12804 Blank Front Panels ........................................................................117

Chapter 10: BlackDiamond 8810 Fan Tray.................................................................................... 119


Overview ................................................................................................................................119
Pre-Installation Requirements ..................................................................................................119
Removing the BlackDiamond 8810 Fan Tray .............................................................................119
Installing the BlackDiamond 8810 Spare Fan Tray .....................................................................120

Chapter 11: BlackDiamond 8810 AC Power Cord Retaining Bracket ............................................... 123
Overview ................................................................................................................................123
Pre-Installation Requirements ..................................................................................................123
Installing the BlackDiamond 8810 AC Power Cord Retaining Bracket...........................................124
Removing the BlackDiamond 8810 AC Power Cord Retaining Bracket ..........................................126

Part 4: BlackDiamond 12804 Switch


Chapter 12: BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis ................................................................................... 129
Safety Information ..................................................................................................................129
BlackDiamond 12804 Architecture...........................................................................................129
BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis Front View .................................................................................130
BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis Rear View ..................................................................................131
Additional BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis Information ................................................................131

Chapter 13: BlackDiamond 12804 MSM and I/O Modules.............................................................. 133


About BlackDiamond 12804 MSM and I/O Modules ...................................................................133
BlackDiamond 12804 MSM Modules........................................................................................134
MSM Activity ....................................................................................................................134
MSM LEDs .......................................................................................................................135
MSM-5 and MSM-5R Modules ...........................................................................................136
BlackDiamond 12804 I/O Modules ...........................................................................................137
I/O Module LEDs ...............................................................................................................138
I/O Port LEDs....................................................................................................................138
GM-20T I/O Module ..........................................................................................................139
GM-20T LEDs .............................................................................................................139
GM-20XT and GM-20XTR I/O Modules ................................................................................139
.......................................................................................................................................139

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 6


Table of Contents

GM-20XT and GM-20XTR LEDs ....................................................................................140


XM-2X and XM-2XR I/O Modules ........................................................................................141
XM-2X and XM-2XR LEDs ............................................................................................141
Installing or Removing a BlackDiamond 12804 MSM or I/O Module.............................................142
Pre-Installation Requirements ............................................................................................142
Distinguishing a BlackDiamond 12804 MSM from an I/O Module ..........................................142
Installing a BlackDiamond 12804 MSM or I/O Module .........................................................142
Removing a BlackDiamond 12804 MSM or I/O Module.........................................................145
BlackDiamond 8800/12804 Blank Front Panels ........................................................................146

Part 5: Common Characteristics of the BlackDiamond 8800 Series


and the BlackDiamond 12804
Chapter 14: BlackDiamond 8800 Series and BlackDiamond 12804 Blank Front Panels................... 149
Overview ................................................................................................................................149
Pre-Installation Requirements ..................................................................................................149
Things to Know .......................................................................................................................150
Removing a Blank Front Panel..................................................................................................150
Installing a Blank Front Panel ..................................................................................................152

Chapter 15: Additional BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis Information............ 153
Overview ................................................................................................................................153
Uncrating and Unpacking the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Chassis .............................................154
BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Chassis Packing List ................................................................154
Uncrating and Unpacking Process.......................................................................................154
Rack Mounting the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Chassis ............................................................156
Pre-Installation Requirements ............................................................................................156
Rack-Mounting Process .....................................................................................................157
Recrating and Repacking the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis ..............................................159
BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Mid-Mount Kit and Mid-Mount Racking ...........................................162
Pre-Installation Requirements ............................................................................................162
Assembling the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Mid-Mount Kit..................................................162
Mid-Mount Racking the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Chassis ................................................164

Chapter 16: BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804 Fan Tray ............................................ 167
Overview ................................................................................................................................167
Pre-Installation Requirements ..................................................................................................167
Removing the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 fan tray ....................................................................167
Installing the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 fan tray.....................................................................169

Chapter 17: BlackDiamond 8800 Series and


BlackDiamond 12804 PSU/Fan Controller171
Overview ................................................................................................................................171
Pre-Installation Requirements ..................................................................................................171
Removing a BlackDiamond 8800/12804 PSU/Fan Controller ......................................................172
Installing a BlackDiamond 8800/12804 Spare PSU/Fan Controller..............................................174

Chapter 18: BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804 AC Power Cord Retainer Channel Bracket ..
175

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 7


Table of Contents

Overview ................................................................................................................................175
BlackDiamond 8806/12804 AC Power Cord Retainer Channel Bracket.........................................175
Pre-Installation Requirements ............................................................................................175
Installing the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 AC Power Cord Retainer Channel Bracket...............176
Removing the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 AC Power Cord Retainer Channel Bracket ..............178

Part 6: BlackDiamond 10800 Series of Switches


Chapter 19: BlackDiamond 10800 System Chassis ....................................................................... 181
BlackDiamond 10800 System Chassis Architecture....................................................................181
BlackDiamond 10800 System Chassis Front View ................................................................181
BlackDiamond 10800 System Chassis Rear View .................................................................183
Power Socket ....................................................................................................................184
Installing the Chassis ..............................................................................................................184
Unpacking the Chassis ......................................................................................................184
Before you Begin.........................................................................................................185
Removing the Accessories Box and Preparing the Rack ...................................................186
Removing the Chassis from the Carton ..........................................................................188
Standard Rack Installation .................................................................................................191
Mid-Mount Rack Installation ..............................................................................................193
Grounding the BlackDiamond 10800 Series Switch..............................................................194
Installing the BlackDiamond 10800 Cable Manager ...................................................................195
Recrating the Chassis ..............................................................................................................200

Chapter 20: BlackDiamond 10800 Series MSMs........................................................................... 205


Overview of MSMs...................................................................................................................205
MSM Activity ....................................................................................................................207
MSM LEDs .......................................................................................................................207
Installing and Removing MSMs ................................................................................................208
Installing the MSM............................................................................................................208
Verifying the MSM Installation............................................................................................210
Removing an MSM ............................................................................................................211

Chapter 21: BlackDiamond 10800 Series I/O Modules .................................................................. 213


I/O Modules Overview ..............................................................................................................214
G60T Module ...................................................................................................................215
G60T LEDs.................................................................................................................215
G60X Module ...................................................................................................................216
Mini-GBIC Ports ..........................................................................................................217
G60X LEDs.................................................................................................................217
G20X Module ...................................................................................................................217
Mini-GBIC Ports ..........................................................................................................218
G20X LEDs.................................................................................................................218
10G6X Module .................................................................................................................219
XENPAK Ports ............................................................................................................219
10G6X LEDs...............................................................................................................220
10G2X Module .................................................................................................................220
XENPAK Ports ............................................................................................................221
10G2X LEDs...............................................................................................................221
10G2H Module .................................................................................................................221

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 8


Table of Contents

XENPAK Ports ............................................................................................................222


Mini-GBIC Ports ..........................................................................................................222
10G2H LEDs ..............................................................................................................222
I/O Module LEDs.....................................................................................................................223
Installing I/O Modules .............................................................................................................223
Verifying the I/O Module Installation .........................................................................................225
LED Indicators ..................................................................................................................225
Displaying Slot Status Information ......................................................................................225
Removing I/O Modules.............................................................................................................226
Installing a Blank Front Panel ..................................................................................................227

Chapter 22: BlackDiamond 10800 Series Switch Fan Tray, Filter, and Power Supply Controller....... 229
BlackDiamond 10800 Series Switch Fan Tray ...........................................................................229
Removing the BlackDiamond 10800 Series Fan Tray..................................................................230
Installing the BlackDiamond 10800 Series Fan Tray ..................................................................231
Replacing the BlackDiamond 10800 Series Filter ......................................................................232
Power Supply Controller...........................................................................................................233
Pre-Installation Requirements ..................................................................................................234
Installing the Power Supply Controllers .....................................................................................234
Verifying a Successful Installation ............................................................................................235

Part 7: Summit X450 Series of Switches


Chapter 23: Summit X450 Series of Switches ............................................................................... 239
Summit X450 Switch Architecture............................................................................................239
Summit X450-24t and X450-24x Front Views......................................................................240
Summit X450-24t and X450-24x Rear View ........................................................................241
Summit X450-24t and X450-24x Switch LEDs ..........................................................................242
Summit X450-24t and X450-24x Switch Installation .................................................................243
Installing the Summit X450-24t or X450-24x Switch ...........................................................243
Rack Mounting the Summit X450-24t or X450-24x Switch ...................................................243
Removing the Summit X450-24t or X450-24x Switch from a Rack ........................................244
Free Standing and Desktop Mounting of Multiple Switches....................................................244

Chapter 24: Summit X450 10Gigabit XENPAK Card ....................................................................... 245


Overview ................................................................................................................................245
Supported ZR XENPAK Combinations .................................................................................246
Minimum Software Required ....................................................................................................246
Installing the Summit XGM-2xn Card ........................................................................................246
Installing XENPAK Modules .....................................................................................................248
Removing a XENPAK Module ...................................................................................................249

Chapter 25: Summit X450 External Power System (EPS)................................................................ 251


Overview ................................................................................................................................251
Installing the External Power System.........................................................................................253
Rack Mounting the EPS-T ..................................................................................................253
Installing an EPS-160 Power Supply into the EPS-T...................................................................254
Connecting the EPS-160 Power Supply ...............................................................................255

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 9


Table of Contents

Removing an EPS-160 from the EPS-T .....................................................................................256

Part 8: Appendixes
Appendix A: Safety Information .................................................................................................... 259
Considerations Before Installing ...............................................................................................259
Installing Power Supply Units...................................................................................................260
Maintenance Safety.................................................................................................................260
General Safety Precautions ......................................................................................................261
LAN Systems ....................................................................................................................261
PoE Devices .....................................................................................................................262
Uninterruptible Power Supply Requirements ........................................................................262
UPS Features..............................................................................................................262
Calculating Amperage Requirements .............................................................................262
UPS Transition Time ...................................................................................................262
Power Supply Cord Selection....................................................................................................263
Battery Replacement and Disposal............................................................................................264
Fiber Optic Ports—Optical Safety .............................................................................................265

Appendix B: Technical Specifications .......................................................................................... 273


BlackDiamond 10800 Series of Switches ..................................................................................273
BlackDiamond 8810 Switch.....................................................................................................276
BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Switch..........................................................................................279
Power Supply Specifications for the BlackDiamond Family of Switches ........................................282
Summit X450 Series of Switches..............................................................................................283

Index .......................................................................................................................................... 285

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 10


Preface

This preface provides an overview of this guide, describes guide conventions, and lists other
publications that might be useful.

WARNING!
Read the safety information in Appendix A thoroughly before installing any Extreme Networks switch. Failure to
follow this safety information can lead to personal injury or damage to the equipment.

WARNING!
Service to all equipment should be performed by trained and qualified service personnel only! Before installing or
removing any components of the system, or before carrying out any maintenance procedures, you must read the
safety information provided in Appendix A of this guide.

Introduction
This guide provides the required information to install an Extreme Networks® BlackDiamond® 10800
series of switches, BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches, or Summit® X450 switch. It also contains
information about site location, switch functionality, and switch operation.

This guide is intended for use by network administrators responsible for installing and setting up
network equipment. It assumes a basic working knowledge of:
● Local area networks (LANs)
● Ethernet concepts
● Ethernet switching and bridging concepts
● Routing concepts
● Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

See the ExtremeXOS Concepts Guide and the ExtremeXOS Command Reference Guide for information about
configuring an Extreme Networks BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches, BlackDiamond 8800 series of
switches, or Summit X450 switch.

NOTE
If the information in the release notes that shipped with your Extreme Networks switch differs from the information
in this guide, follow the release notes.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 11


Preface

Conventions
Table 1 and Table 2 list conventions used throughout this guide.

Table 1: Notice icons


Icon Notice Type Alerts you to...
Note Important features or instructions.

Caution Risk of personal injury, system damage, or loss of data.

Warning Risk of severe personal injury.

Table 2: Text conventions


Convention Description
Screen displays This typeface represents information as it appears on the screen, or command
syntax.
The words “enter” When you see the word “enter” in this guide, you must type something, and then
and “type” press the Return or Enter key. Do not press the Return or Enter key when an
instruction simply says “type.”
[Key] names Key names appear in text in one of two ways:
• Referenced by their labels, such as “the Return key” or “the Escape key”
• Written with brackets, such as [Return] or [Esc]
If you must press two or more keys simultaneously, the key names are linked with a
plus sign (+). Example:
Press [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[Del].
Words in italicized type Italics emphasize a point of information or denote new terms at the place where
they are defined in the text.

Related Publications
The Extreme Networks ExtremeXOS™ switch documentation set includes:
● ExtremeXOS Concepts Guide
● ExtremeXOS Command Reference Guide
● ExtremeXOS Release Notes

Documentation for Extreme Networks products is available from the Extreme Networks website at the
following location:

http://www.extremenetworks.com/services/documentation

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 12


Related Publications

You can select and download the following Extreme Networks documentation from the Documentation
Overview page:
● Software User Guides
● Hardware User Guides

You can find archived user guides for software at:

http://www.extremenetworks.com/services/documentation/swuserguides.asp

You can also find archived installation guides for hardware at:

http://www.extremenetworks.com/services/documentation/hwuserguides.asp

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 13


Preface

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 14


1 Site Preparation
1 Site Preparation

This chapter describes:


● Planning Your Site on page 18
● Meeting Site Requirements on page 18
● Evaluating and Meeting Cable Requirements on page 26
● Meeting Power Requirements on page 32
● Applicable Industry Standards on page 35

The requirements described in this chapter are intended for the system administrator, network
equipment technician, or network manager responsible for installing and managing the network
hardware. It assumes a working knowledge of local area network (LAN) operations, and a familiarity
with communications protocols that are used on interconnected LANs. Installation, maintenance, and
removal of a switch, chassis, or its components must be done by qualified service personnel only.

Qualified service personnel have had appropriate technical training and experience that is necessary to
be aware of the hazards to which they are exposed when performing a task and of measures to
minimize the danger to themselves or other people.

By carefully planning your site, you can maximize the performance of your existing network and ensure
that it is ready to migrate to future networking technologies.

To learn more about safety issues and to ensure safety compliance, see Appendix A.

WARNING!
Service to all equipment should be performed by trained and qualified service personnel only! Before installing or
removing any components of the system, or before carrying out any maintenance procedures, you must read the
safety information provided in Appendix A of this guide.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 17


Site Preparation

Planning Your Site


To install your equipment successfully, you should plan your site carefully. The site planning process
has three major steps:
● Step 1: Meeting Site Requirements
● Step 2: Evaluating and Meeting Cable Requirements
● Step 3: Meeting Power Requirements

Step 1: Meeting Site Requirements


Your physical installation site must meet the following requirements for a safe and successful
installation:
● Building and electrical code requirements
● Environmental, safety, and thermal requirements for the equipment you plan to install
● Distribution rack requirements

Step 2: Evaluating and Meeting Cable Requirements


After examining your physical site and ensuring all environment requirements are met, evaluate and
compare your existing cable plant with the requirements of the Extreme Networks equipment to
determine if you need to install new cables (or cabling).

Step 3: Meeting Power Requirements


To run your equipment safely, you must meet the specific power requirements for each power supply
unit installed within the system.

Meeting Site Requirements


This section addresses the various requirements to consider when preparing your installation site,
including:
● Operating Environment Requirements
● Rack Specifications and Recommendations

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 18


Meeting Site Requirements

Operating Environment Requirements


Verify that your site meets all environmental and safety requirements.

Virtually all areas of the United States are regulated by building codes and standards. During the early
planning stages of installing or modifying your LAN, it is important that you develop a thorough
understanding of the regulations that pertain to your location and industry.

Building and Electrical Codes


Building and electrical codes vary depending on your location. Comply with all code specifications
when planning your site and installing cable. The following sections are provided as a resource to
obtain additional information.

Information on major building codes is located at the following websites:


● International Code Council (ICC); 5203 Leesburg Pike; Falls Church, Virginia 22041 USA.
http://www.iccsafe.org
http://www.sbcci.org

Five authorities on electrical codes are:


● National Electrical Code (NEC) Classification (USA only)—a recognized authority on safe electrical
wiring. Federal, state, and local governments use NEC standards to establish their own laws,
ordinances, and codes on wiring specifications. The NEC classification is published by the National
Fire Protection Association (NFPA). The address is NFPA; 1 Batterymarch Park; Quincy,
Massachusetts 02169 USA. http://www.nfpa.org
● Underwriters’ Laboratory (UL) (USA only)—an independent research and testing laboratory. UL
evaluates the performance and capability of electrical wiring and equipment to determine whether
they meet certain safety standards when properly used. Acceptance is usually indicated by the
words “UL Approved” or “UL Listed.” The address is UL; 333 Pfingsten Road; Northbrook, Illinois
60062-2096 USA. http://www.ul.com
● National Electrical Manufacturing Association (NEMA) (USA only)—an organization of electrical
product manufacturers. Members develop consensus standards for cables, wiring, and electrical
components. The address is NEMA; 1300 N. 17th Street; Rosslyn, Virginia 22209. http://www.nema.org
● Electronics Industries Alliance (EIA)—a trade association that develops technical standards,
disseminates marketing data, and maintains contact with government agencies in matters relating to
the electronics industry. The address is EIA; 2500 Wilson Boulevard; Arlington, Virginia 22201 USA.
http://www.eia.org
● Federal Communications Commission (FCC)—a commission that regulates all interstate and foreign
electrical communication systems that originate in the United States according to the
Communications Act of 1934. The FCC regulates all U.S. telephone and cable systems. The address is
FCC; 445 12th Street S.W.; Washington, D.C. 20554 USA. http://www.fcc.gov

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 19


Site Preparation

Wiring Closet Considerations


You should consider the following recommendations for your wiring closet:
● Ensure that your system is easily accessible for installation and service. See “Rack Specifications and
Recommendations” on page 24 for information.
● Use appropriate AC power, power distribution, and grounding for your specific installation.
● Use a vinyl floor covering in your wiring closet. (Concrete floors accumulate dust, and carpets can
cause static electricity.)
● Prevent unauthorized access to wiring closets by providing door locks. Install the equipment in a
secured, enclosed, and restricted-access area, ensuring that only qualified service personnel have
access to the equipment.
● Provide adequate overhead lighting for easy maintenance.
● Ensure that each wiring closet has a suitable ground. All distribution racks and equipment installed
in the closet should be grounded.
● Ensure that all system environmental requirements are met, such as ambient temperature and
humidity.

NOTE
Extreme Networks recommends that you consult an electrical contractor for commercial building and wiring
specifications.

Temperature
Extreme Networks equipment generates a significant amount of heat. It is essential that you provide a
temperature-controlled environment for both performance and safety.

Install the equipment only in a temperature- and humidity-controlled indoor area that is free of airborne
materials that can conduct electricity. Too much humidity can cause a fire. Too little humidity can
produce electrical shock and fire.

The following are some general thermal recommendations for your wiring closet:
● Ensure that the ventilation in the wiring closet is adequate to maintain a temperature below 104° F
(40° C).
● Install a reliable air conditioning and ventilation system.
● Keep the ventilation in the wiring closet running during non-business hours; otherwise, the
equipment can overheat.
● Maintain ambient operating temperature: 32° to 104° F (0° to 40° C).
● Maintain storage temperature: -40° to 158° F (-40° to 70° C).

NOTE
Like all electrical equipment, product lifetimes degrade with increased temperature. If possible, temperatures should
be kept at approximately 78° F (25° C) or lower.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 20


Meeting Site Requirements

BlackDiamond Chassis Spacing Requirements


Extreme Networks recommends placing no more than three chassis next to each other due to chassis-to-
chassis heating. The following are some general recommendations for installing your BlackDiamond
10800 series of switches, BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches, or your BlackDiamond 12804 switch:
● A minimum of 17.32 inches (44 cm) between each set of three BlackDiamond switches.
or
● Place patch panels between each set of three BlackDiamond switches. A patch panel does not require
any power and does not generate any heat.

NOTE
Up to five adjacent switches will continue to function without safety concerns. However, product lifetime may
degrade with continued exposure to high temperatures in close proximity and long term reliability may be
compromised.

Summit X450 Switch Spacing Requirements


Make sure cables and other equipment does not block the air intake or outflow on the Extreme
Networks Summit X450 switches. It is best to have 3 to 5 inches (7.64 to 12.7 cm) of clear space in front
of the air intake and outflow vents on the sides of the switch.

For proper airflow through the Summit X450 switch, leave clear space on the left and right sides of the
switch.

BlackDiamond Chassis Airflow Requirements


To ensure proper airflow through a BlackDiamond switch, refer to the following recommendations
when you are installing your switch:
● BlackDiamond 10800 switches require approximately 3 inches (7.62 cm) to 6 inches (15.24 cm)
around both the front and rear of the chassis from any cabinet wall or other obstruction for proper
airflow.
● BlackDiamond 8800 and 12804 switches require approximately 1.5 inches (3.81 cm) to 3 inches (7.62
cm) around both the left and right sides of the chassis from any cabinet wall or other obstruction for
proper airflow.
● Air temperature measured 1 inch (2.54 cm) from the fan inlet should be less than 104 °F (40 °C).

The airflow of the BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches, BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches, and
BlackDiamond 12804 switch moves through the power supplies and is independent of the airflow
through the modules as shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2. For example, if the power supply fans fail, the
airflow through the module area of the chassis will not cool down the power supplies.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 21


Site Preparation

Figure 1: Airflow through the BlackDiamond 10800 series system chassis

Airflow
through
chassis

Airflow through
power supplies
EX_010

Figure 2: Airflow through the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis

Airflow through
fan tray

Airflow at power
supply level
ASP045

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 22


Meeting Site Requirements

Summit X450 Switch Spacing Requirements


The airflow of the Summit X450 switch moves from side to side of the switch. Ensure that you have
clear space around the sides of the switch.

Make sure cables and other equipment does not block the air intake or outflow on the Extreme
Networks Summit X450 switches. It is best to have 3 to 5 inches (7.64 to 12.7 cm) of clear space in front
of the air intake and outflow vents on the sides of the switch. Depending on other conditions in the
equipment room, it may be possible to install the switches closer to each other; consult your Extreme
Networks Customer Support representative for guidance.

Electrostatic Discharge
Your system must be protected from static electricity or electrostatic discharge (ESD). Take the following
measures to ensure optimum system performance:
● Remove materials that can cause electrostatic generation (such as synthetic resins) from the wiring
closet. Check the appropriateness of floor mats and flooring.
● Connect metal chassis, conduit, and other metals to ground using dedicated grounding lines.
● Use electrostatically safe equipment and the ESD-preventive wrist strap that is provided with your
equipment. All switches come with ESD-preventive wrist strap connectors and an ESD-preventive
wrist strap as shown in Figure 3.

Figure 3: Ensure that you use an ESD-preventive wrist strap when handling switch components

ESD ground
connection

ESD strap

EX_013

Humidity
Operating humidity should be kept between 50 to 70% relative humidity non-condensing during typical
operation and 10% to 95% relative humidity (non-condensing) for short intervals to maximize
equipment life.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 23


Site Preparation

Rack Specifications and Recommendations


Racks should conform to conventional standards. In the United States, use EIA Standard RS-310C:
Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment. In countries other than the United States, use IEC Standard
297. In addition, verify that your rack meets the basic mechanical, space, and earthquake requirements
that are described in this section.

Mechanical Recommendations for the Rack


Use distribution racks that meet the following mechanical recommendations:
● Use an open style, 19-inch (48.26 cm) rack to facilitate easy maintenance and to provide proper
ventilation.
● Use a rack made of steel or aluminum.
● The rack should use the universal mounting rail hole pattern that is identified in IEC Standard 297.
● The rack should have designated earth grounding connections (typically on the base).
● The rack must meet earthquake safety requirements equal to that of the installed chassis.
● The mounting holes should be flush with the rails to accommodate the chassis.
● Install equipment into the lower half of the rack first to avoid making the rack top-heavy.
● The rack should support approximately 600 pounds (272 kilograms).

Protective Grounding for the Rack


Use a rack grounding kit and a ground conductor that is carried back to earth or to another suitable
building ground.

All Extreme Networks switches are designed with mounting brackets that provide solid metal-to-metal
connection to the rack. If you do not use equipment racks, you can attach wiring terminals directly to
the mounting brackets for appropriate grounding. Extreme Networks switches have grounding
terminals that are mounted on the back of the chassis.

At minimum, follow these guidelines to ground equipment racks to the earth ground:
● CAD weld appropriate wire terminals to building I-beams or earth ground rods.
● Use the appropriate chassis grounding wire for your system, which is dependant upon the available
input current to the power supply.
■ For AC systems using a 20A breaker per PSU (SSI AC), the chassis ground can be as small as
14ga. The power cable ground should be the same size as the primary.
■ For DC systems using a 40A breaker per PSU (SSI DC), the chassis ground can be as small as
10ga. The power cable ground should be the same size as the primary.
■ This recommendation does not apply to the Summit X450 series of switches. The Summit X450
series of switches do not need separate chassis grounding for AC or DC systems.

NOTE
For complete details on power supplies and power supply cords, refer to the following: Chapter 4, “Extreme
Networks 700/1200 W AC Power Supply Units,” Chapter 5, “Extreme Networks 1200 W DC Power Supply Units,”
and “Power Supply Cord Selection” on page 263 inside of Appendix A, “Safety Information.”

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 24


Meeting Site Requirements

● Drill and tap wire terminals to equipment racks.


● Position the earth ground as close to the equipment rack as possible to maintain the shortest wiring
distance possible.
● Use a ground impedance tester or micro-ohm meter to test the quality of earth ground connection at
the chassis. This will insure good grounding between the chassis, rack, and earth ground.

NOTE
Because building codes vary worldwide, Extreme Networks strongly recommends that you consult an electrical
contractor to ensure proper equipment grounding for your specific installation.

Space Requirements for the Rack


Provide enough space in front of and behind the switch so that you can service it easily. Allow a
minimum of 48 inches (122 cm) in front of the rack and 24 inches (61 cm) behind the rack. When using a
relay rack, provide a minimum of 24 inches (61 cm) of space behind the mounted equipment. Extra
room on each side is optional.

WARNING!
The chassis does not have a switch for turning the unit on and off. Power to the chassis is disconnected by
removing the wall plug from the electrical outlet. Ensure that all plugs and electrical outlets are easily accessible.

Securing the Rack


The rack should be attached to the wiring closet floor with 3/8-inch (9.5 mm) lag screws or equivalent
hardware. The floor under the rack should be level within 3/16-inch (5 mm). Use a floor-leveling
cement compound if necessary or bolt the racks to the floor as shown in Figure 4.

Figure 4: Properly secured rack

Secure to floor
with 3/8-inch lag screws or bolts
SPG_007

Brace open distribution racks if the channel thickness is less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 25


Site Preparation

Evaluating and Meeting Cable Requirements


This section addresses requirements for the cable you should use when installing your network
equipment. It includes:
● Cabling Standards
● Cable Labeling and Record Keeping
● Installing Cable
● RJ-45 Connector Jackets
● Radio Frequency Interference

Cabling Standards
Extreme Networks recommends using the Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI)
Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD), which is globally recognized as a standard
in site planning and cabling. For information, go to:
http://www.bicsi.org

Cable Labeling and Record Keeping


A reliable cable labeling system is essential when planning and installing a network. Maintaining
accurate records helps you to:
● Relocate devices easily.
● Make changes quickly.
● Isolate faults in the distribution system.
● Locate the opposite end of any cable.
● Know the types of network devices that your cabling infrastructure can support.

Consider the following recommendations when setting up a cable labeling system suitable for your
installation:
● Identify cables by securely attaching a label to all cable ends.
● Assign a unique block of sequential numbers to the group of cables that run between each pair of
wiring closets.
● Assign a unique identification number to each distribution rack.
● Identify all wiring closets by labeling the front panel of your Extreme Networks equipment and
other hardware.
● Keep accurate and current cable identification records.
● Post records near each distribution rack. Include the following cable drop information: the cable
source, destination, and jumper location.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 26


Evaluating and Meeting Cable Requirements

Installing Cable
Consider the following recommendations when you connect cable to your network equipment:
● Examine cable for cuts, bends, and nicks.
● Support cable using a cable manager that is mounted above connectors to avoid unnecessary weight
on the cable bundles.
● Use cable managers to route cable bundles to the left and right of the network equipment to
maximize accessibility to the connectors.
● Provide enough slack, approximately 2 to 3 inches (5.08 to 7.62 cm), to provide proper strain relief as
shown in Figure 5.
● Bundle cable using velcro straps to avoid injuring cables.
● If you build your own cable, ensure that cable is properly crimped.
● When installing a patch panel using twisted pair wiring, untwist no more than 1 inch (2.54 cm) of
the cable to avoid radio frequency (RF) interference.
● Discharge the RJ45 Ethernet cable before plugging it into a port on the switch.
● When required for safety and fire rating requirements, use plenum-rated cable. See your local
building codes for determining when it is appropriate to use plenum-rated cable, or refer to IEC
standard 850.
● Keep all ports and connectors free of dust.

WARNING!
Unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable can build up ESD charges when being pulled into a new installation. Before
connecting any category 5 UTP cable to the switch, discharge ESD from the cable by plugging the RJ45 into a LAN
Static Discharge device or use an equivalent method.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 27


Site Preparation

Figure 5: Properly installed and bundled cable

Cable managers supporting


and directing cables

Proper
bundling
of cables

Adequate
slack, and
bend radius
SPG_008

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 28


Evaluating and Meeting Cable Requirements

Fiber Optic Cable


Fiber optic cable must be treated gently during installation. Every cable has a minimum bend radius, for
example, and fibers will be damaged if the cables are bent too sharply. It is also important not to stretch
the cable during installation. We recommend that the bend radius for fiber optic cable equals 2-inch
(5.08 cm) minimum for each 90 degree turn as shown in Figure 6.

NOTE
Kinks and sharp bends can destroy or impair the cable’s ability to convey light pulses accurately from one end of the
cable to the other. Use care in dressing the optical fiber cables: provide satisfactory strain relief to support the cable
and maintain an adequate bend radius at all cable turns, particularly where the cable connects to the I/O module.

Figure 6: Bend radius for fiber optic cable

Minimum
2-in. (5.08-cm)
radius
in 90˚ bend

90˚

Optical fiber cable SPG_002

Cable Distances
Table 3 shows cable media types and maximum distances that support reliable transmission in
accordance with international standards except where noted.

Table 3: Media types and maximum distances


Mhz•Km Maximum Distance
Standard Media Type Rating (Meters)
1000BASE-SX 50/125 μm multimode fiber 400 500
(850 nm optical
50/125 μm multimode fiber 500 550
window)
62.5/125 μm multimode fiber 160 220
62.5/125 μm multimode fiber 200 275
1000BASE-LX 50/125 μm multimode fiber 400 550
(1300 nm optical
50/125 μm multimode fiber 500 550
window)
62.5/125 μm multimode fiber 500 550
10/125 μm single-mode fiber – 5,000
10/125 μm single-mode fiber* – 10,000
1000BASE-LX70 10/125 μm single-mode fiber – 70,000
(1550 nm optical
window)

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 29


Site Preparation

Table 3: Media types and maximum distances (Continued)


Mhz•Km Maximum Distance
Standard Media Type Rating (Meters)
1000BASE-T Category 5 and higher UTP cable – 100
100BASE-TX Category 5 and higher UTP cable – 100
10BASE-T Category 3 and higher UTP cable – 100

* Proprietary to Extreme Networks. Connections between two Extreme Networks 1000BASE-LX interfaces that use 10/125 μm
single-mode fiber can use a maximum distance of 10,000 meters.

RJ-45 Connector Jackets


Use RJ-45 cable with connector jackets that are flush with the connector or that have connectors with a
no-snag feature.

Using cable with jackets that are wider than the connectors can cause:
● Connectors that are not properly aligned with the port.
● Crowded cable installation, which can cause connectors to pop out of the port.

Figure 7 shows examples of connector jacket types that are not recommended as well as those that are
recommended.

Figure 7: RJ-45 connector jacket types

Not recommended
Best
0.1" = 1mm actual
Better 39.37% : 254% SPG_001

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 30


Evaluating and Meeting Cable Requirements

Radio Frequency Interference


If you use UTP cabling in an installation, take precautions to avoid RF interference. RF interference can
cause degradation of signal quality, and, in an Ethernet network environment, can cause excessive
collisions, loss of link status, or other physical layer problems that can lead to poor performance or loss
of communication.

To prevent RF interference, avoid the following devices or situations:


● Attaching UTP cable to AC power cables
● Routing UTP cable near antennas, such as a ham radio antenna
● Routing UTP cable near equipment that could exhibit RF interference, such as ARC welding
equipment
● Routing UTP cable near electrical motors that contain coils
● Routing UTP cable near air conditioner units
● Routing UTP cable near electrical transformers

In areas or applications where these situations cannot be avoided, use fiber optic cabling or shielded
twisted pair cabling (STP).

NOTE
Because harmonics can appear on the neutral line of a typical three-phase power circuit, Extreme Networks
recommends using a harmonics meter in new installations.

Making Network Interface Cable Connections


Use the appropriate type of cable to connect the ports of your switch to another switch or router.

Working carefully, one port at a time:


1 Verify that you have identified the correct cable for the port.
2 Use an alcohol wipe or other appropriate cleaning agent to clean the cable connectors; make sure
they are free of dust, oil, and other contaminants.
3 If you are using optical fiber cable, align the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) connectors with the
correct corresponding connectors on the switch or the I/O module.
4 Press the cable connectors into their mating connectors on the switch or I/O module until the cable
connector is firmly seated.
5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 for the remaining cables on this or other switches or I/O modules.
6 Dress and secure the cable bundle to provide appropriate strain relief and protection against bends
and kinks.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 31


Site Preparation

Meeting Power Requirements


This section discusses power requirements, including:
● LAN Systems
● PoE Devices
● Power Supply Requirements
● AC Power Cable Requirements
● Uninterruptible Power Supply Requirements

LAN Systems
WARNING!
This equipment is intended for intra-building. Intra-building connections are defined as cable runs that are located
in the same building as the unit.

This equipment can be connected between buildings if one of the following requirements are met:
● Cable runs less then 140 ft between buildings
● Cable runs between buildings are directly buried.
● Cable runs between buildings are in an underground conduit, where a continuous metallic cable
shield or a continuous metallic conduit containing the cable is bonded to each building grounding
electrode system.

Power Supply Requirements


Adhere to the following requirements to operate your Extreme Networks equipment safely:
● Ensure that your equipment is placed in an area that accommodates the power consumption and
component heat dissipation specifications.
● Ensure that your power supply meets the site power or AC power requirements of the network
equipment.
● When connecting power to installed equipment, avoid connecting through an extension cord or
power strip.
● If your switch includes more than one power supply, connect each power supply to different,
independent power sources.
If a power source fails, it will affect only the switch power supply to which it is connected. If all
switch power supplies are connected to a single power source, the entire switch is vulnerable to a
power source failure.

For power specifications for Extreme Networks products, see the Extreme Networks website at:

http://www.extremenetworks.com

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 32


Meeting Power Requirements

PoE Devices
When connecting power over Ethernet (PoE) devices to a PoE switch, all connections between the PoE
device and the switch must remain within the same building and use a low-voltage power distribution
system per IEEE 802.3af.

AC Power Cable Requirements


Use an AC power cable appropriate for your country. Check your local electrical codes and regulatory
agencies for power cable requirements. The countries listed in Table 4 have the following additional
requirements.

Table 4: AC power cable requirements


Country Requirements
USA and Canada • The cable set must be UL-approved and CSA-certified.
• The minimum specification for the flexible cable is No. 18
AWG (1.5 mm2), Type SVT or SJT, 3-conductor.
• The cable set must have a rated current capacity of at least the amount rated for
each specific product.
• The attachment plug must be either an Earth-grounding type with a NEMA 5-
15P (10 A, 110 V) configuration or a NEMA L6-15P (10 A, 208/240 V)
Denmark The supply plug must comply with section 107-2-D1, standard DK2-1a or DK2-5a.
Switzerland The supply plug must comply with SEV/ASE 1011.
Argentina The supply plug must comply with Argentinian standards.

NOTE
When using dual power supplies, make sure that each AC power supply attaches to an independent power source.

Replacing the Power Cable


If the power cable plug is unsuitable and must be replaced, connect the power supply wires for the
switch according to the following scheme:
● Brown wire to the Live (Line) plug terminal, which may be marked with the letter “L” or colored
red.
● Blue wire to the Neutral plug terminal, which may be marked with the letter “N” or colored black.
● Yellow/Green wire to the Ground plug terminal, which may be marked with the letter “E” (the
Earth symbol) or colored yellow/green.

Uninterruptible Power Supply Requirements


An uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is a device that sits between a power supply (such as a wall
outlet) and a device (such as a switch) to prevent outages, sags, surges, and bad harmonics from
adversely affecting the performance of the device.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 33


Site Preparation

UPS Features
A UPS traditionally can perform the following functions:
● Absorb relatively small power surges.
● Smooth out noisy power sources.
● Continue to provide power to equipment during line sags.
● Provide power for some time after a blackout has occurred.

In addition, some UPS or UPS plus software combinations provide the following functions:
● Automatically shut down equipment during long power outages.
● Monitor and log power supply status.
● Display the voltage (current draw) of the equipment.
● Restart equipment after a long power outage.
● Display the voltage currently on the line.
● Provide alarms on certain error conditions.
● Provide short circuit protection.

Selecting a UPS
To determine UPS requirements for your switch, ask these questions:
● What are the amperage requirements?
● What is the longest potential time period that the UPS would be required to supply backup power?
● Where will the UPS be installed?
● What is the maximum transition time that your installation will allow?

NOTE
Extreme Networks recommends that you use a UPS that provides online protection.

Calculating Amperage Requirements


To determine the size of UPS that you need:
1 Locate the voltage and amperage requirements for each piece of equipment. These numbers are
usually located on a sticker on the back or bottom of your equipment. Then multiply the numbers
together to get Volt-Amps (VA):
VA = Volts x Amperes
2 Add the VA from each piece of equipment together to find the total VA requirement.
To determine the minimum amperage requirements for your UPS, we recommend that you add 30%
to the total.

UPS Transition Time


Transition time is the time that is necessary for the UPS to transfer from utility power to full-load
battery power. For Extreme Networks products, a transition time of less than 20 milliseconds is required
for optimum performance.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 34


Applicable Industry Standards

Applicable Industry Standards


For more information, see the following ANSI/TIA/EIA standards:
● ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A—discusses the six subsystems of a structured cabling system.
● ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A—discusses design considerations.
● ANSI/TIA/EIA-606—discusses cabling system administration.
● ANSI/TIA/EIA-607—discusses commercial building grounding and bonding requirements.

You can access these standards at:

http://www.ansi.org
or
http://www.tiaonline.org

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 35


Site Preparation

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 36


2 Initial Management Access

This chapter describes:


● Connecting Equipment to the Console Port on page 37
● Logging In for the First Time on page 39

Connecting Equipment to the Console Port


Connection to the console port is used for direct local management. The console port settings are:
● Baud rate—9600
● Data bits—8
● Stop bit—1
● Parity—None
● Flow control—XON/XOFF

The terminal or PC with terminal-emulation software that you connect to an Extreme Networks switch
must be configured with these settings. This procedure is described in the documentation supplied with
the terminal.

Appropriate cables are available from your local supplier, or you can make your own. To ensure the
electromagnetic compatibility of the unit, use only shielded serial cables. Table 5 describes the pinouts
for a DB-9 console plug connector.

Table 5: Pinouts for the DB-9 console connector


Function Pin Number Direction
DCD (data carrier detect) 1 In
RXD (receive data) 2 In
TXD (transmit data) 3 Out
DTR (data terminal ready) 4 Out
GND (ground) 5 -
DSR (data set ready) 6 In
RTS (request to send) 7 Out
CTS (clear to send) 8 In

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 37


Initial Management Access

Figure 8 shows the pinouts for a 9-pin to 25-pin (RS-232) null-modem cable.

Figure 8: Null-modem cable pinouts

Switch PC/Terminal
Cable connector: 9-pin female Cable connector: 25-pin male/female
Screen Shell 1 Screen
TxD 3 3 RxD
RxD 2 2 TxD
Ground 5 7 Ground
RTS 7 4 RTS
CTS 8 20 DTR
DSR 6 5 CTS
DCD 1 6 DSR
DTR 4 8 DCD 25pin

Figure 9 shows the pinouts for a 9-pin to 9-pin (PC-AT) null-modem serial cable.

Figure 9: PC-AT serial null-modem cable pinouts

Switch PC-AT Serial Port


Cable connector: 9-pin female Cable connector: 9-pin female
Screen Shell Shell Screen
DTR 4 1 DCD
TxD 3 2 RxD
RxD 2 3 TxD
CTS 8 4 DTR
Ground 5 5 Ground
DSR 6 6 DSR
RTS 7 7 RTS
DCD 1 8 CTS 9pin

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 38


Logging In for the First Time

Logging In for the First Time


After your switch has completed all power on self-tests (POSTs), it is operational. When the switch is
operational, you can log in and configure an IP address for the default VLAN (named default).

NOTE
In the case of chassis products, such as the BlackDiamond family of switches, the management port on the MSM is
part of the management VLAN by default. Please refer to “Management Ports” on page 44 for further details.

To manually configure the IP settings:


1 Connect a terminal or PC with terminal-emulation software to the MSM on the BlackDiamond 10K
series or BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches, or the console port of the Summit X450 switch.
2 At your terminal, press [Return] one or more times until you see the login prompt.
3 At the login prompt, enter the default user name admin to log on with administrator privileges. For
example:
login: admin
Administrator capabilities allow you to access all switch functions.

NOTE
For more information about logging in to the switch and configuring switch management access, see the
ExtremeXOS Concepts Guide.

4 At the password prompt, press [Return].


The default user name admin has no password assigned to it. When you have successfully logged on
to the system, the command line prompt displays the system name (for example,
BlackDiamond10808>) in its prompt.

NOTE
For more information about how to assign a specific system name, see the ExtremeXOS Concepts Guide.

5 Assign an IP address and subnetwork mask for VLAN default by typing:


configure vlan default ipaddress 123.45.67.8 255.255.255.0
Your changes take effect immediately.
6 Save your configuration changes so that they will be in effect after the next system reboot by typing:
save
The configuration is saved to the configuration database of the MSM modules in the switch.

NOTE
For more information about saving configuration changes, see the ExtremeXOS Concepts Guide.

7 When you are finished with these tasks, log out of the switch by typing:
logout

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 39


Initial Management Access

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 40


2 Common Characteristics of the BlackDiamond Switches
3 BlackDiamond Overview, Optics, and More

This chapter describes common characteristics of the BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches, the
BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches, and the BlackDiamond 12804 switch. This chapter describes:
● Supported Features on page 43
● Full-Duplex Support on page 44
● Management Ports on page 44
● Mini-GBIC Interfaces on page 44
● XENPAK Interfaces on page 50
● External Compact Flash Memory Card on page 56

Supported Features
This section describes the features of the BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches, the BlackDiamond
8800 series of switches, and the BlackDiamond 12804 switch. These switches are chassis-based, Ethernet
service core switches designed for core applications. If the information in the release notes differs from
the information in this guide, follow the release notes. For more information about configuring the
switch, see the ExtremeXOS Concepts Guide and the ExtremeXOS Command Reference Guide.

The features of these switches include:


● I/O modules that are hot-swappable and include Gigabit Ethernet copper ports (10/100/1000) and
Gigabit Ethernet fiber ports (SFP), or 10 Gigabit Ethernet ports
● Redundant, load-sharing, hot-swappable power supplies
● Field-replaceable, hot-swappable fan trays
● Auto-negotiation for half-duplex or full-duplex operation on 10/100/1000 Mbps ports
● Load sharing on multiple ports

NOTE
For supported features specific to the Summit X450 switch, see Chapter 23.

NOTE
Extreme Networks optics are tested to work in all supported Extreme Networks switches. We recommend that all
customers use Extreme Networks optics in their Extreme Networks switches. Extreme Networks assumes no liability
for third-party optics. While Extreme Networks does not block third-party optics, we cannot ensure that all third-party
party optics operate properly in all Extreme Networks switches. The customer assumes all risks associated with using
third-party optics in Extreme Networks switches.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 43


BlackDiamond Overview, Optics, and More

Full-Duplex Support
Extreme Networks switches provide full-duplex support for all ports. Full-duplex support means that
frames can be transmitted and received simultaneously, which, in effect, doubles the bandwidth
available on a link. Most ports on an Extreme Networks switch will auto-negotiate duplex in the default
configuration. Gigabit Ethernet fiber ports and 10 Gigabit Ethernet ports operate only in full-duplex
mode in accordance with technical standards.

Management Ports
The 10/100BASE-TX Ethernet management port allows you to communicate directly to the Central
Processing Unit (CPU) of the switch. You can plug an Ethernet cable directly from your laptop into the
management port, which provides you direct access into the switch. This access allows you to view and
locally manage the switch configurations.

Do not assign an in-band IP address to the management port VLAN. The management port VLAN is an
out-of-band VLAN, so if it is assigned an in-band IP address (an address where the source and
destination are in the same subnet), the switch treats it as a normal VLAN and attempts to route traffic
through it.

Extreme Networks does not recommend that you use the management port to route traffic to any front
panel port on the switch. The management port is designed for switch management purposes.

Mini-GBIC Interfaces
The BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches, the BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches, and the
BlackDiamond 12804 switch support the small form pluggable (SFP) Gigabit interface converter (GBIC),
also known as the mini-GBIC. The switches and the modules identify the type of mini-GBIC that is
installed.

NOTE
The Summit X450 switch also supports these mini-GBICs, which install the same way on that switch.

Mini-GBIC Types and Specifications


The types of mini-GBIC interfaces are as follows:
● SX mini-GBIC, which conforms to the 1000BASE-SX standard
● LX mini-GBIC, which conforms to the 1000BASE-LX standard
● ZX mini-GBIC, which conforms to the IEEE 802.3z standard
● Dual-speed 100FX/1000LX mini-GBICs:
■ 100FX, which conforms to the 100BASE-FX standard
■ 1000LX, which conforms to the 1000BASE-LX standard

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 44


Mini-GBIC Interfaces

Use only Extreme Networks-certified mini-GBICs, available from Extreme Networks, in the mini-GBIC
port in the switch or module.

Table 6 describes the specifications for the SX mini-GBIC interface, Table 7 describes the specifications
for the LX mini-GBIC interface, and Table 8 describes the specifications for the ZX mini-GBIC interface.

Table 6: SX mini-GBIC specifications


Parameter Minimum Typical Maximum
Transceiver
Optical output power -9.5 dBm -4 dBm
Center wavelength 830 nm 850 nm 860 nm
Receiver
Optical input power sensitivity -17 dBm
Optical input power maximum 0 dBm
Operating wavelength 770 nm 860 nm
General
Total system budget 7.5 dB

Extreme Networks recommends that 3 dB of the total budget be reserved for losses induced by cable
splices/connectors and operating margin. There is no minimum attenuation or minimum cable length
restriction.

Table 7: LX mini-GBIC specifications


Parameter Minimum Typical Maximum
Transceiver
Optical output power -11 dBm -3 dBm
Center wavelength 1270 nm 1310 nm 1355 nm
Receiver
Optical input power sensitivity -19 dBm
Optical input power maximum -3 dBm
Operating wavelength 1270 nm 1355 nm
General
Total system budget 8 dB

Measure cable plant losses with a 1310 nm light source and verify this to be within budget. When you
calculate the maximum distance attainable using optical cable with a specified loss per kilometer (for
example 0.25 dB/km), Extreme Networks recommends that 3 dB of the total budget be reserved for
losses induced by cable splices/connectors and operating margin. There is no minimum system budget
or minimum cable length restriction because the maximum receive power is the same as the maximum
transmit power. There is no minimum attenuation or minimum cable length restriction.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 45


BlackDiamond Overview, Optics, and More

Table 8: ZX mini-GBIC specifications


Parameter Minimum Typical Maximum
Transceiver
Optical output power -2 dBm 0 dBm 3 dBm
Center wavelength 1540 nm 1550 nm 1570 nm
Receiver
Optical input power sensitivity -23 dBm
Optical input power maximum -3 dBm
Operating wavelength 1540 nm 1550 nm 1570 nm

Measure cable plant losses with a 1550 nm light source and verify this to be within budget. When you
calculate the maximum distance attainable using optical cable with a specified loss per kilometer (for
example, 0.25 dB/km), Extreme Networks recommends that you reserve 3 dB of the total budget for
losses induced by cable splices/connectors and operating margin. A minimum system budget or
attenuation is required to prevent saturation of the receiver.

Table 9 displays the total optical system budget and Table 10 displays the minimum attenuation
requirements between long-range optics.

Table 9: Total system budgets for LX and ZX GBICs


Receivers
ZX GBIC
(prior to ZX GBIC
Transceiver LX70 GBIC Rev 03) Rev 03 LX100 GBIC
LX70 GBIC 22 dB 23.5 dB 23 dB 29 dB
ZX GBIC (prior to Rev 03) 18 dB 19.5 dB 19 dB 25 dB
ZX GBIC 20 dB 21.5 dB 21 dB 27 dB
LX100 GBIC 23 dB 24.5 dB 24 dB 30 dB

Table 10: Minimum attenuation requirements for LX and ZX GBICs


Receivers
ZX GBIC
(prior to ZX GBIC
Transceiver LX70 GBIC Rev 03) Rev 03 LX100 GBIC
LX70 GBIC 8 dB 8 dB 8 dB 12 dB
ZX GBIC (prior to Rev 03) 2 dB 2 dB 2 dB 6 dB
ZX GBIC 5 dB 5 dB 5 dB 9 dB
LX100 GBIC 8 dB 8 dB 8 dB 12 dB

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 46


Mini-GBIC Interfaces

Table 11 describes the specifications for the dual-speed 100FX/1000LX mini-GBIC interface.

Table 11: Dual-speed 100FX/1000LX mini-GBIC specifications


Parameter Minimum Typical Maximum
Transceiver
Optical output power:
100FX -15 dBm -8 dBm
1000LX -11 dBm -3 dBm
Center wavelength 1270 nm 1310 nm 1355 nm
Receiver
Optical input power sensitivity:
100FX -25 dBm
1000LX -19 dBm
Optical input power maximum:
100FX -3 dBm
1000LX -3 dBm
Operating wavelength 1270 nm 1355 nm
Total system budget
100FX (SMF) 10 dBm
1000LX (SMF) 8 dBm

Measure cable plant losses with a 1310 nm light source and verify this to be within budget. When you
calculate the maximum distance attainable using optical cable with a specified loss per kilometer (for
example 0.25 dB/km), Extreme Networks recommends that 3 dB of the total budget be reserved for
losses induced by cable splices/connectors and operating margin. There is no minimum attenuation or
minimum cable length restriction.

NOTE
The 100FX/1000LX designed behavior for link detection is as follows: the link status is based only on whether there
is a light present in the receive cable. Therefore, if a single strand is broken, the link partner on the other port will
not detect link down.

Table 12 displays the minimum operating range for the 100FX/1000LX dual-speed mini-GBIC over each
optical fiber type.

Table 12: Dual-speed 100FX/1000LX minimum operating range


Fiber type 100FX 1000LX
62.5/125 μm MMF 2 to 2000 m 2 to 550 m
50/125 μm MMF 2 to 2000 m 2 to 550 m
10/125 μm SMF 2 to 10,000 m 2 to 5,000 m

Mini-GBICs are Class 1 laser devices, and they operate at 3.3 V. Use only Extreme Networks-certified
mini-GBIC devices.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 47


BlackDiamond Overview, Optics, and More

WARNING!
Mini-GBICs can emit invisible laser radiation. Avoid direct eye exposure with the laser beam.

If you see an amber blinking mini-GBIC port status LED after you install a mini-GBIC, that mini-GBIC
is not certified by Extreme Networks. To correct this problem, install an Extreme Networks-certified
mini-GBIC, available from Extreme Networks, into the mini-GBIC port.

If you install a mini-GBIC not certified by Extreme Networks into a switch and insert a cable to bring
up the link, the port status LED remains “off” and an error specifying the use of a non-Extreme
Networks-certified mini-GBIC is sent to the syslog. To view the syslog and to determine why the link is
down, use the show log command. To correct this problem, install an Extreme Networks-certified mini-
GBIC, available from Extreme Networks, into the mini-GBIC slot.

Preparing to Install or Replace a Mini-GBIC


To ensure proper installation, before inserting the mini-GBIC:
1 Inspect and clean the fiber tips, coupler, and connectors.
2 Prepare and clean an external attenuator, if needed.
3 Do not stretch the fiber.
4 Make sure the bend radius of the fiber is not less than 2 inches (5.08 cm).

In addition, Extreme Networks recommends the following when installing or replacing mini-GBICs on
an active network:
● Use the same type of mini-GBIC at each end of the link.
● Connect one end of the link to the Tx port. Without an attenuator, measure the total loss from the Tx
port to the other site of the link. The total loss must not exceed the total optical system budget.

After you complete these tasks, you are ready to install or replace a mini-GBIC.

Installing and Removing a Mini-GBIC


You can add mini-GBICs into, or remove mini-GBICs from your switch without powering off the
system. Figure 10 shows the two types of mini-GBIC connectors.

Figure 10: Mini-GBIC modules

Module A Module B XM_024

Mini-GBICs are 3.3 V Class 1 laser devices. Use only Extreme-approved devices.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 48


Mini-GBIC Interfaces

CAUTION
Mini-GBICs can emit invisible laser radiation. Avoid direct eye exposure to beam.

NOTE
Remove the LC fiber-optic connector from the mini-GBIC prior to removing the mini-GBIC from the port.

NOTE
Install mini-GBICs only in the SFP mini-GBIC receptacles.

To insert a mini-GBIC connector:

1 Holding the mini-GBIC by its sides, insert the mini-GBIC into the port on the switch.
2 Slide the mini-GBIC into the port, until you hear it click. If the mini-GBIC has a handle, push up on
the handle to secure the mini-GBIC.

To remove a mini-GBIC connector:

If you see an amber blinking mini-GBIC port status LED, the mini-GBIC installed in your switch or
module is not approved, supported, or certified by Extreme Networks. To correct this problem, install
an Extreme Networks-certified mini-GBIC.

1 To remove a mini-GBIC similar to the one labeled “Module A” in Figure 10, gently press and hold
down the black plastic tab at the bottom of the connector to release the mini-GBIC, and pull the
mini-GBIC out of the port.
2 To remove a mini-GBIC connector similar to the one labeled “Module B” in Figure 10, gently rotate
the front handle and pull the mini-GBIC out of the port.

Troubleshooting Mini-GBIC Port Status LEDs on the BlackDiamond


10800 Switches and the Summit X450 Switch
Use only Extreme Networks-certified mini-GBIC devices in the mini-GBIC port in the switch, card, or
module.

If you see an amber blinking mini-GBIC port status LED after you install a mini-GBIC, that mini-GBIC
is not certified by Extreme Networks. To correct this problem, install an Extreme Networks-certified
mini-GBIC, available from Extreme Networks, into the mini-GBIC port.

If you install a mini-GBIC not certified by Extreme Networks into a switch and insert a cable to bring
up the link, the port status LED remains “off” and an error specifying the use of a non-Extreme
Networks-certified mini-GBIC is sent to the syslog. To view the syslog and to determine why the link is
down, use the show log command. To correct this problem, install an Extreme Networks-certified mini-
GBIC, available from Extreme Networks, into the mini-GBIC slot.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 49


BlackDiamond Overview, Optics, and More

XENPAK Interfaces
The BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches, the BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches, and the
BlackDiamond 12804 switch support several types of XENPAK modules. All of these modules conform
to the 10 Gigabit Ethernet standard defined by the IEEE 802.3ae as applicable

WARNING!
XENPAK modules contain Class 1 laser devices. Invisible laser radiation can occur when the connectors are open.
Do not stare into the beam. This device is compliant with FCC 21 CFR 1040.10, 1040.11 and EN60825-1
A2:2001.

XENPAK Types and Specifications


The types of XENPAK interfaces are as follows:
● SR XENPAK
● LR XENPAK
● ER XENPAK
● ZR XENPAK
● LX4 XENPAK
● LRM-LR XENPAK

NOTE
CX4 XENPAKs are also supported with Extreme Networks devices; contact your vendor to obtain these.

NOTE
Use only Extreme Networks-approved XENPAK modules in all Extreme Networks devices.

Table 13 describes the specifications for the SR XENPAK module, Table 14 describes the specifications
for the LR XENPAK module, Table 15 describes the specifications for the ER XENPAK module, Table 16
describes the specifications for the ZR XENPAK module, Table 17 describes the specifications for the
LX4 XENPAK module, Table 18 and Table 19 describe the specifications for the LRM-LR XENPAK
module.

NOTE
The launch power (measured using the average power method used by power meters) is measured at the factory. The
average launch power min value is provided as a reference, not a pass/fail criteria.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 50


XENPAK Interfaces

Table 13: SR XENPAK module specifications


Parameter Minimum Maximum
Average launch power min -7.3 dBm
Channel insertion loss:
62.5 μm (160/200 MHz*km) 1.6 dB
62.5 μm (200 MHz*km) 1.6 dB
50 μm (400 MHz*km) 1.7 dB
50 μm (500 MHz*km) 1.8 dB
50 μm (2000 MHz*km) 2.6 dB
Wavelength range 840 nm 860 nm
Operating distance range
(depends on type and modal bandwidth)
62.5 μm MMF (160 MHz*km) 26 m
62.5 μm MMF (200 MHz*km) 33 m
50 μm MMF (400 MHz*km) 66 m
50 μm MMF (500 MHz*km) 82 m
50 μm MMF (2000 MHz*km) 300 m
Maximum receiver sensitivity in OMA -11.1 dBm

The SR XENPAK supports multimode fiber (MMF) and has an SC connector.

Table 14: LR XENPAK module specifications


Parameter Minimum Maximum
Average launch power -7.3 dBm 0.5 dBm
Optical link budget 6.2 dB
Wavelength range 1260 nm 1355 nm
Distance range 2m 10 km
Maximum receiver sensitivity in OMA -12.6 dBm

The LR XENPAK supports single-mode fiber (SMF) and has an SC connector.

Table 15: ER XENPAK module specifications


Parameter Minimum Maximum
Average launch power -4.7 dBm 4.0 dBm
Optical link budget 10.9 dB
Wavelength range 1530 nm 1565 nm
Distance range:
5 dBm attentuation 2m 40 km
Maximum receiver sensitivity in OMA -14.1 dBm

The ER XENPAK supports SMF and has an SC connector.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 51


BlackDiamond Overview, Optics, and More

Table 16: ZR XENPAK module specifications


Parameter Minimum Maximum
Transmitter
Optical output power 0 dBm 4 dBm
Center wavelength 1530 nm 1565 nm
Receiver
Optical input power -22 dBm -7 dBm
Operating wavelength 1530 nm 1565 nm
General
Optical link loss 11 dB 22 dB
Optical dispersion 0 ps/nm 1600 ps/nm
Distance 80 km

The ZR XENPAK supports SMF and has an SC connector.

WARNING!
To prevent permanent damage to the ZR XENPAK and other equipment: always check the optical input power of the
receiver before inserting the fiber. The maximum optical input power for the receiver is -7 dBm. If you use optical
loopback for diagnostics purposes, the loopback requires a minimum of 10 dB optical attenuation. The
recommended attenuation range is 10 dB to 15 dB.

Table 17: LX4 XENPAK module specifications


Parameter Minimum Maximum
Transmitter
Average launch power, 4 lanes + 5.5 dBm
Average launch power, per lane - 0.5 dBm
Optical modulation amplitude (OMA), per lane:
SMF - 6.25 dBm - 1.25 dBm
MMF - 6.75 dBm - 1.25 dBm
Receiver
Average receive power, 4 lanes + 5.5 dBm
Average receive power, per lane - 0.5 dBm
Receive sensitivity (OMA), per lane - 14.45 dBm
Optical link budget
Wavelength range 1269.0 nm 1282.4 nm
1293.5 nm 1306.9 nm
1318.0 nm 1331.4 nm
1342.5 nm 1355.9 nm
Distance range:
SMF 10 km
MMF 300 m

The LX4 XENPAK supports multimode fiber (MMF) in intra-building connections and single-mode fiber
(SMF) for interbuilding connections and has an SC connector.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 52


XENPAK Interfaces

Table 18: LRM-LR XENPAK module specifications


Parameter Minimum Maximum
Transmitter Characteristics
Center wavelength 1260 nm 1355 nm
Launch power in OMA -4.5 dBm 1.5 dBm
Average launch power -6.5 dBm 0.5 dBm
Receiver Characteristics
LRM stressed receiver sensitivity in OMA (pre- - -6 dBm
and post-cursor normative tests)
LRM stressed receiver sensitivity in OMA - -6.5 dBm
(symmetric normative)
LR receiver sensitivity in OMA - -12.6 dBm

Table 19: LRM-LR XENPAK module specifications - Optical link operation length
ISO/IEC 11801: Fiber Bandwidth Minimum Maximum
Fiber Core Type Fiber Type Fiber Type (Mhz*Km) Distance (m) Distance (m)
62.5 um - MMF 160/500 0.5 220
62.5 um OM1 MMF 200/500 0.5 220
50 um - MMF 400/400 0.5 100
50 um OM2 MMF 500/500 0.5 220
50 um OM3 MMF 1500/500 0.5 220
9 um S1 SMF N/A 2 10k

The LRM-LR XENPAK supports single-mode fiber (SMF), has an SC connector, and conforms to the
10 Gigabit Ethernet standard defined by the IEEE 802.3ae as applicable.

WARNING!
To prevent permanent damage to the LRM-LR XENPAK and other equipment, always check the optical input power
of the receiver before inserting the fiber. The absolute maximum optical input power for the receiver is +4 dBm.
The maximum input power for error-free link operation is +0.5dBm.

NOTE
The mode conditioning patch cord is not provided with the LRM-LR XENPAK; you obtain this cord from a third-party
vendor.

The IEEE 802.3aq 10GBASE-LRM Standard supports two different fiber cable launches for both 62.5 um
and 50 um fiber. A direct multimode fiber launch can be used for all supported fiber types. However, a
mode conditioning patch (MCP) cord may be necessary for the link to operate error free.

Some fibers have defects near the center that cause large amounts of signal distortion. The MCP avoids
launching light into the center of the fiber by precisely offsetting the light away from the defect. The
user should be aware that 50 um and 62.5 um fiber require different offsets. Therefore, the mode-
conditioning patch cords for each fiber type should not be used interchangeably. Interchanging 50 um
and 62.5 um mode conditioning patch cords may cause the link to operate at an elevated bit error rate
(BER).

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 53


BlackDiamond Overview, Optics, and More

Extended bandwidth fibers (OM3 fibers) are specifically engineered without a central defect. When a
10GBASE-LRM XENPAK module with OM3 fiber is used, an MCP is not necessary.

To install the mode conditioning patch cord:

Connect the end of the patch cord with the single-mode (SMF)/MMF connectors to the LRM-LR
XENPAK (see Figure 11). Connect the end of the patch cord with the MMF/MMF SC connectors to
MMF.

Figure 11: Mode conditioning patch cord assembly


To LRM transceiver To fiber plant
Beige color Beige color
identifier identifier
Multimode plant fiber
Rx
Tx
Single-mode fiber Offset Multimode plant fiber
Blue color Beige color
identifier identifier
XM_063

Installing and Removing a XENPAK Module


WARNING!
XENPAK modules become very hot after prolonged use. Take care when removing a XENPAK module from the
chassis or option card. If the XENPAK module is too hot to touch, disengage the XENPAK module and allow it to
cool before removing it completely.

This section describes installing and removing the XENPAK module, a 10 Gbps optical transceiver. You
can install or remove the XENPAK module from your Extreme Networks switch without powering off
the system. The module is shown in Figure 12.

CAUTION
The XENPAK module of the Summit X450 switch is installed into an optional module card. Although the module
card is not hot-swappable, you can hot swap the XENPAK into the module card on the Summit X450 switch. See
Chapter 24 for information on the optional module card for XENPAKs on the Summit X450 switch.

Figure 12: XENPAK module

Card edge
connector

EWUG003B

The XENPAK module is a Class 1 laser device. Use only Extreme-approved devices on all Extreme
Networks switches.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 54


XENPAK Interfaces

CAUTION
The XENPAK module can emit invisible laser radiation. Avoid direct eye exposure to the beam.

WARNING!
To prevent ESD damage to the XENPAK module, always use an appropriately grounded ESD-preventive wrist strap
when installing or removing the module. Handle the module by its sides only. Never touch the card-edge connectors
at the insertion end of the module.

To install a XENPAK module:


1 Remove the XENPAK module from its antistatic container and remove the dust covers from the
module optical connectors.
If your module has a protective pad covering the card-edge connector, remove it. Store the antistatic
container, dust covers, and card-edge connector protective pad in a clean location from which they
can be easily retrieved if you need to uninstall the module.
2 Remove any dust covers from the port on the module into which you are installing the XENPAK.
3 Holding the module by its sides, insert it into the slot on the I/O module.
4 Slide the module as far back into the slot as possible, until you hear it click, indicating that it is
firmly attached.
5 Secure the module to the I/O module faceplate by turning the two captive screws clockwise until
they are hand-tight.

NOTE
To ensure that your XENPAK module is undamaged upon installation, you can correlate factory test data with your
installation site test data by consulting the average power reference values shown on the XENPAK module test data
sheet (Part No. 121074-00) enclosed with your module.

To remove a XENPAK module:


1 Turn the two captive screws counter-clockwise until they are completely free from the I/O module
faceplate. (The captive screws remain attached to the XENPAK module.)

WARNING!
Remove the SC fiber-optic connector from the XENPAK module prior to removing the XENPAK module from the
I/O module. Do not stare directly into the beam.

2 Gripping both captive screws, gently pull the XENPAK module out of the slot.
3 Place the dust covers back into the XENPAK module connectors.
4 Place the XENPAK module immediately into an antistatic container to protect it from ESD damage
and dust.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 55


BlackDiamond Overview, Optics, and More

External Compact Flash Memory Card


The MSM installed in the BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches, the BlackDiamond 8800 series of
switches, and the BlackDiamond 12804 switch include a PCMCIA slot (identified as compact flash in
Figure 14) located next to the console port on the MSM. This slot accepts the 256 MB industrial-grade
compact flash memory card, which can be used to download a new version of ExtremeXOSTM and for a
variety of other functions, including capturing debug information and core dump files. See the
ExtremeXOS Concepts Guide for more information about how to use the external compact flash memory
card.

The memory card is a flat, smooth card that easily fits between your thumb and forefinger. The card has
a top and bottom side with a ridge protruding from the edge, as shown in Figure 13. The labeling on
the top of the card identifies it as a PCMCIA card.

Figure 13: Sample compact flash card

ASP043

The rest of this section describes the compact flash memory card requirements and how to install and
remove an external compact flash memory card.

Supported External Compact Flash Memory Cards


The external compact flash slot supports third party 256 MB industrial-grade compact flash cards.

NOTE
You must use an industrial-grade compact flash card in the external compact flash slot of the MSM.

Installing an External Compact Flash Memory Card


You do not need to power off the system or remove the MSM from the chassis to install an external
compact flash memory card.

You need the following tools and equipment to install a compact flash memory card:
● ESD-preventive wrist strap (provided)
● Industrial-grade compact flash memory card

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 56


External Compact Flash Memory Card

To install the memory card:


1 Attach the ESD-preventive wrist strap to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground
receptacle that is located on the top-left corner of the switch front panel.
2 Locate the compact flash slot on the MSM, as shown in Figure 14.

Figure 14: Compact flash slot location in the BlackDiamond 10800 series MSM (left) and the
BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches MSM (right)

Module status LEDs Module status LEDs


SYS/STA ERR
MSTR/DIAG ENV
Module reset button

Mini-GBIC
fiber ports

Compact flash

Management port Console port


Console port MGMT port

Compact flash
A
D
R
EX_003 ASP038

3 Grasp the memory card between your thumb and forefinger.


For the BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches, the side with the ridge faces to the left of the chassis.
For the BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches, the side with the ridge faces toward the bottom of the
chassis.
For the BlackDiamond 12804 switch, the side with the ridge faces toward the bottom of the chassis.
4 Slide the card into the compact flash slot until you feel resistance. A portion will extrude from the
slot.
5 Gently push the card until it is seated into the slot. The card should be fully inserted, or seated,
inside the slot.
6 To verify that the card is fully seated, use the show memorycard command.

Removing an External Memory Card


You do not need to power off the system or remove the MSM from the chassis to remove an external
memory card.

Use the eject memorycard command to ensure that you do not lose any data when you remove the
card. After you issue the eject memorycard command, you can manually remove the card from the
external compact flash slot on the MSM. For more information about the eject memorycard command,
see the ExtremeXOS Concepts Guide.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 57


BlackDiamond Overview, Optics, and More

To manually remove the external compact flash memory card:


1 Attach the ESD-preventive wrist strap, that is provided, to your wrist and connect the metal end of
the ESD-preventive wrist strap to the ground receptacle that is located on the top-left corner of the
switch front panel.
2 Locate the black release pin that sits just above the compact flash slot.
3 Press the release pin in until the card releases from the slot.
The card releases to an intermediate position; the card remains partially inserted but is no longer
seated in the slot.
4 Using your thumb and forefinger, remove the card completely and place it in a safe location.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 58


4 Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC
Power Supply Units
This chapter describes:
● Overview on page 59
● Pre-Installation Requirements on page 59
● Installing an Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU on page 60
● Removing an Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU on page 62
● Specifications on page 62

Overview
This chapter describes important safety information, specifications, and correct procedures for installing
and removing the Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC power supply units (PSUs) into and out of the
power supply bay of the following switches: BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches, BlackDiamond
8800 series of switches, or the BlackDiamond 12804 switch.

The Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSUs are fully fault tolerant and load-sharing. After the system
is properly configured, should one Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU fail, the others will provide
sufficient power to operate a fully loaded switch. The power supply bay can accommodate up to six
hot-swappable Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSUs. See the ExtremeXOS Concepts Guide for
information on configuring your Extreme Networks BlackDiamond switch.

Pre-Installation Requirements

CAUTION
Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSUs do not have switches for turning the unit on and off. Remove the wall plug
from the electrical outlet to disconnect the power to an Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU. Ensure that this
connection is easily accessible.

You need the following tools and equipment before installing or removing Extreme Networks
700/1200 W AC PSU(s):
● ESD-preventive wrist strap
● Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU(s)
● BlackDiamond switch
● Power supply cord (110 V AC, 220 V AC, or applicable to country of use)
● Thermal protective gloves (required for removal)

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 59


Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC Power Supply Units

Installing an Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU

CAUTION
Ensure that the Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU circuit is not overloaded. Use proper over-current
protection, such as a circuit-breaker, to prevent over-current conditions.

To ensure proper installation of an Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU:

1 Attach an ESD-preventive wrist strap to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground
receptacle, which is located on the top-left corner of the switch front panel.
2 Ensure that the Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU is right side up and the locking handle is
open (see Figure 15).

Figure 15: Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU with locking handle open

EX_015

3 Gently slide the Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU all the way into the power supply bay (see
Figure 16).

CAUTION
Do not slam the Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU into the system switch backplane. Use the locking handle
to secure the Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU into the system switch.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 60


Installing an Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU

Figure 16: Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU sliding into the power supply bay

EX_011

4 Secure the Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU into the power supply bay by pushing down on
the locking handle until it clicks in place.
5 Connect the AC power supply cord:
a If you are just replacing a power supply, you do not need to unplug the AC power cord.
b If you are installing a new power supply into a previously unused slot on a switch with a
retaining bracket, remove the power cord retaining bracket. (See Chapter 11, “BlackDiamond 8810
AC Power Cord Retaining Bracket” or Chapter 18, “BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804
AC Power Cord Retainer Channel Bracket” for information on removing the retaining bracket
and re-installing it.) Connect the AC power cord to the AC input on the front of the switch and to
the wall outlet on the other end. Then, re-install the power cord retaining bracket.
c If you are installing the power supply on a switch that does not have a power cord retaining
bracket, connect the AC power cord to the AC input on the front of the switch and to the wall
outlet on the other end. Then, install the power cord retaining bracket. See Chapter
11, “BlackDiamond 8810 AC Power Cord Retaining Bracket” or Chapter 18, “BlackDiamond 8806
and BlackDiamond 12804 AC Power Cord Retainer Channel Bracket” for information on
installing the bracket.

NOTE
Leave the ESD strap permanently connected to the switch; this is to ensure that the strap is always available when
you need to handle ESD-sensitive components.

To install additional Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSUs, repeat steps 1 through 5.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 61


Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC Power Supply Units

Removing an Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU

CAUTION
The AC PSU is hot to the touch; use thermal protective gloves when handling the 700/1200 W AC PSU during
removal.

To ensure proper removal of an Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU:

1 Attach an ESD-preventive wrist strap to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground
receptacle that is located on the top-left corner of the switch front panel (if not already attached).
2 For the AC power cord:
a If you are going to use the same AC power cord for the new unit, you do not need to touch the
power cord at all.
b If you are going to use a new AC power cord, remove the power cord retaining bracket. (See
Chapter 11, “BlackDiamond 8810 AC Power Cord Retaining Bracket” or Chapter
18, “BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804 AC Power Cord Retainer Channel Bracket” for
information on removing the retaining bracket and re-installing it.) Connect the AC power cord
to the AC input on the front of the switch and to the wall outlet on the other end. Then, re-install
the power cord retaining bracket.
3 Lift the handle up on the Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU.
4 Pull on the handle of the Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU to remove it from the power
supply bay.
5 Place both hands underneath the Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU to support the weight
once it is pulled out from the switch.

NOTE
Leave the ESD strap permanently connected to the switch; this is to ensure that the strap is always available when
you need to handle ESD-sensitive components.

Specifications
The 700/1200 W AC PSU functions from 90 V to 264 V and 47 Hz to 63 Hz AC Input. Each PSU
provides 700 W to the system if the AC input is in the 110 V low-line output power range and 1200 W
to the system if the AC input is in the 220 V high-line output power range.

A greater number of PSUs are needed to support the load if the low-line power range is used to power
the switch. The software determines the maximum available power required for the switch and enables
the modules accordingly. You must power the entire switch from either the low-line power range or the
high-line power range only. Table 20 lists the characteristics and specifications for the 700/1200 W AC
PSU.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 62


Specifications

Table 20: 700/1200 W AC power supply characteristics and specifications


Characteristic Specification

Input
AC Voltage Input Range 90-264 V AC
Maximum Input Amperages 7 A @ 200 V AC (high-line)
10 A @ 90 V AC (low-line)
AC Line Frequency 47 to 63 Hz
AC Power Supply Input Socket IEC 320 C14
Minimum Wire Size 16 AWG (1.0mm2) copper stranded

Output
DC Output 48 V DC, 24 A DC / 12 V DC, 4 A (high-line)
48 V DC, 13.5 A DC / 12 V DC, 4 A (low-line)
DC Output Power (W) 700 / 1200 W

CAUTION
The 700/1200 W AC PSU does not have a switch for turning the unit on and off. Remove the plug from the
electrical outlet to disconnect power to the 700/1200 W AC PSU. Ensure that this connection is easily accessible.

CAUTION
Ensure that the 700/1200 W AC PSU circuit is not overloaded. Use proper over-current protection, such as a circuit-
breaker, to prevent over-current conditions.

Front Panel
The front panel of the Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU provides status LEDs. Table 21 describes
the LED behavior on the front panel.

Table 21: Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU front panel LED behavior
LED Color Indicates
Power Blinking Green Power is present and standby output is on.
Solid Green AC power is present and power supply is operating normally.
Off There is no power present.
Predictive Blinking Amber A fan has slowed down and is about to fail.
Failure
Off The fans and power supply are operating normally.
Fail Blinking Amber There is a current limit on 48 VDC output.
Solid Amber The power supply has failed, or there is no AC power to this power
supply.
Off The power supply is operating normally.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 63


Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC Power Supply Units

The front panel on each Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU contains two cooling fans as shown in
Figure 15. Airflow enters from the front vents on the Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU and exits
to the rear vents of the switch. Airflow through the Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU AC is
independent from the airflow that exists through the rest of the switch.

The AC input is located on the switch directly in back of each power supply bay. The front of the
Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU has a handle with a lever mechanism for both insertion and
removal as shown in Figure 16.

Power Supply Cords


Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU(s) come with both 110 V AC and 220 V AC power supply
cords. The 110 V AC power supply cord allows for a maximum DC output power of 700 W. The 220V
AC power supply cord allows for a maximum DC output power of 1200 W.

CAUTION
All power supply cords provided by Extreme Networks are designed for use in the United States and Canada only.
Power supply cords for use outside of North America are typically provided by a third-party distribution center and
must meet the following requirements:

● Power supply cords must be agency certified for country of use.


● Power supply cords must contain an IEC 320 C13 connector on the end of the PSU.
● Power supply cords must contain an appropriately rated and approved wall plug applicable to the
country of installation.
● Power supply cords must be less than 5 m long.
● Wire size must be a minimum of 16 AWG (1.0 mm2) copper-stranded.

WARNING!
Ensure that the source outlet is properly grounded before plugging the AC power cord into Extreme Networks
700/1200 W AC PSU.

NOTE
For further details, refer to“Power Supply Cord Selection” on page 263 inside of Appendix A, “Safety Information.”

Fuse
The Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU line and neutral legs are both fused. Power to the switch
may still be live if the neutral fuse is open. This is not a field operator replaceable fuse. In the event of
failure, immediately return the Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU for a complete replacement.

WARNING!
Field operators must not attempt to configure or replace fuses within the Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSUs!
In the event of failure, immediately return the defective Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU for a complete
replacement.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 64


Specifications

Operating Conditions
Operating conditions for the Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC PSU(s) are as follows:
● Operating temperature: 0°C to 40°C
● Storage temperature: -40°C to 70°C
● Operating humidity: 10% to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing
● Operational shock: 30 m/s2 (3g)

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 65


Extreme Networks 700/1200 W AC Power Supply Units

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 66


5 Extreme Networks 1200 W DC Power Supply
Units
This chapter describes:
● Overview on page 67
● Safety Information on page 67
● Minimum Software Required on page 68
● Pre-Installation Requirements on page 68
● Installing the DC Wiring on page 68
● Installing an Extreme Networks 1200 W DC PSU on page 69
● Removing an Extreme Networks 1200 W DC PSU on page 72
● Specifications on page 73

Overview
This chapter describes important safety information, specifications, and correct procedures for installing
and removing Extreme Networks 1200 W DC power supply units (PSUs) into and out of the power
supply bay of the BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches, the BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches,
and the BlackDiamond 12804 switch.

Extreme Networks 1200 W DC PSUs are fully fault tolerant, hot-swappable, and load sharing in an N+1
configuration. If one DC PSU fails in this configurations, the others will provide sufficient power to
operate a fully loaded switch.

The power supply bay can accommodate up to six hot-swappable Extreme Networks 1200 W DC PSUs.
In an N+N configuration, each group of power supplies are able to provide A/B feed redundancy for
the system.

Safety Information

CAUTION
Do not mix AC and DC power supplies in the same BlackDiamond switch.

Installation, maintenance, or replacement of a BlackDiamond switch, power supply, module, or any of


the components must be performed by trained and qualified service personnel only. Trained and
qualified service personnel are people with appropriate technical training and necessary experience to
be aware of the hazards to which they are exposed in performing these tasks and of measures to
minimize the dangers to themselves and others.

For central DC power connections, the 1200 W DC PSU is intended to be installed only in Restricted
Access locations (Dedicated Equipment Rooms, Equipment Closets, or the like) in accordance with
Articles 110-16, 110-17, and 110-18 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA-70.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 67


Extreme Networks 1200 W DC Power Supply Units

CAUTION
Building codes vary worldwide; therefore, Extreme Networks strongly recommends that you consult an electrical
contractor to ensure proper equipment grounding and power distribution for your specific installation.

WARNING!
Field operators must not attempt to open the 1200 W DC PSU enclosure for any reason; the PSU does not contain
user-serviceable parts. In the event of failure, return the defective 1200 W DC PSU to Extreme Networks for repair
or replacement.

Minimum Software Required


You must be running ExtremeXOS version 11.3 or later for the system to recognize the DC PSU.

Pre-Installation Requirements
You need the following tools and equipment before installing or removing 1200 W DC PSU(s):
● Electrostatic discharge (ESD)-preventive wrist strap
● 1200 W DC PSU(s)
● BlackDiamond switch
● Input DC power cable (provided with DC PSU)
● -48 VDC power source capable of providing 50 A dedicated power to each of the 1200 W DC PSUs
installed in the switch
● Thermal protective gloves (required for removal)

Installing the DC Wiring


The input DC cable for the DC PSU is supplied along with the 1200 W DC PSU (see Figure 17); you
must use this cable with the DC PSU.

Figure 17: Input DC power cable for the 1200 W DC PSU

Lock

Return Black: Return

-48Vdc Blue: -48V

Ground Green/yellow:
Ground
10 ft.
EX_135

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 68


Installing an Extreme Networks 1200 W DC PSU

Each 1200 W DC PSU must be powered by a 50 A dedicated power source that delivers -40 to -72 VDC
constant power to each 1200 W DC PSU. Power distribution to the 1200 W DC PSU shall be provided
using the -48 VDC harness provided. Power to the 1200 W DC PSU can be from either a 50 A UL-
approved overcurrent protection breaker or an SELV- approved power source in accordance with IEC
60950-1 utilizing 50 A overcurrent protection.

The input DC cable has an input connector on one end and precut wire on the other end that goes to
the DC power source. The connector end has a locking mechanism that locks onto the DC PSU to
prevent accidental removal of the input DC cable.

If necessary, use appropriate termination lugs for 8 AWG (10 mm2) copper-stranded wire on cable ends
of the cable to connect to the DC power source.

The blue termination (-48 V) connects to a 50 A overcurrent protection circuit device, and the black
(return) termination connects directly to the RTN bus of the DC power source. The green/yellow
termination (ground) must connect to the same earth ground point as the switch.

Installing an Extreme Networks 1200 W DC PSU


To ensure proper installation of an Extreme Networks 1200 W DC PSU:

1 Attach an ESD-preventive wrist strap to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground
receptacle, which is located on the top-left corner of the switch front panel.

CAUTION
Ensure that the grounding lugs on the back of the switch are securely connected to earth ground.

2 Ensure that the 1200 W DC PSU is right side up, and press the yellow locking lever to the left while
lifting the handle. (see Figure 18).

NOTE
Do not connect input DC cable to DC PSU prior to inserting the DC PSU into the switch.

Figure 18: 1200 W DC PSU with locking handle open

Open

Lock

Yellow
lever

EX_130

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 69


Extreme Networks 1200 W DC Power Supply Units

3 Gently slide the 1200 W DC PSU all the way into the power supply bay (see Figure 19).
Ensure that the DC PSU is fully seated in the switch.

CAUTION
Do not slam the 1200 W DC PSU into the system switch backplane.

Figure 19: 1200 W DC PSU sliding into the power supply bay

EX_131

4 Connect the input DC cable to the front of the 1200 W DC PSU as shown in Figure 20.

NOTE
An AC power cord is not required for proper functioning of the DC PSU.

5 Ensure that the input connector latch locks onto the DC PSU.

NOTE
Ensure that the DC circuit is not energized before you connect the input cable to the 1200 W DC PSU.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 70


Installing an Extreme Networks 1200 W DC PSU

Figure 20: Connecting the cable to the front of the 1200 W DC PSU

Locking
handle
open
Yellow
lever

Locking handle closed


traps DC plug
Remove/insert
DC plug
EX_132

6 Secure the 1200 W DC PSU into the power supply bay by pushing down on the locking handle until
it clicks in place.

NOTE
The DC PSU does not energize until the locking handle latches.

CAUTION
Use caution when routing the cable harnesses to minimize stress on the cables. It is recommended that the left
most cable harness be routed across the switch and exit out the right side of the grate. The right most cable harness
should be routed across the switch and exit out the left side of the grate. It is important to route each of the outer
most cables out the opposite side of installation to maximize the bend radius and to avoid stress on the cables. The
four middle cables can route in either direction.

7 Energize the DC circuit for the 1200 W DC PSU.

To install additional 1200 W DC PSUs, repeat steps 2 through 6.

NOTE
Leave the ESD strap permanently connected to the switch; this is to ensure that the strap is always available when
you need to handle ESD-sensitive components.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 71


Extreme Networks 1200 W DC Power Supply Units

Removing an Extreme Networks 1200 W DC PSU

CAUTION
The DC PSU is hot to the touch; use thermal protective gloves when handling the 1200 W DC PSU during removal.

Follow these steps to ensure proper removal of an Extreme Networks 1200 W DC PSU:

1 Attach an ESD-preventive wrist strap to your bare wrist and connect the metal end to the ground
receptacle that is located on the top-left corner of the switch front panel (if not already attached).
2 De-energize the DC circuit for the 1200 W DC PSU to be removed.
3 Press the yellow lever on the DC PSU to the left while lifting the handle up on the 1200 W DC PSU.
4 Disconnect the cable from the front of the DC PSU by pressing down the catch (see Figure 21) and
pulling out the cable prior to removing the DC PSU from the system.

Figure 21: Disconnecting the cable from the DC PSU


Squeeze catch
to release plug

EX_133

WARNING!
Ensure that the 1200 W DC PSU does not have the input cabled connected at any time when the DC PSU is not
installed into the switch. Do not remove the DC PSU from the switch prior to disconnecting the input DC cable from
the PSU.

5 Pull on the handle of the 1200 W DC PSU to remove it from the power supply bay.
6 Using thermal protection gloves, place both hands underneath the 1200 W DC PSU to support the
weight once it is pulled out from the switch.

To remove additional 1200 W DC PSUs, repeat steps 2 through 6.

NOTE
Leave the ESD strap permanently connected to the switch; this is to ensure that the strap is always available when
you need to handle ESD-sensitive components.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 72


Specifications

Specifications
Table 22: 1200 W DC power supply characteristics and specifications
Characteristic Specification
Input
Nominal input voltage -48 VDC , -60 VDC
Voltage input range -40.5 VDC to -72 VDC
Input currents -40 VDC @ 35 A
-48 VDC @ 30 A
-60 VDC @ 23 A
Maximum in-rush current Not more than 80 A for 5 ms
Input circuit protection 50 A
Input wire type 8 AWG (10 mm2) copper-stranded rated @
90 C min
(Wire harness with PSU connector provided
with each DC PSU)
Output
-48 VDC output 1150 W
-12 VDC output 50 W

Front Panel
The front panel of the 1200 W DC PSU provides status LEDs. Table 23 identifies the symbols and
describes the LED behavior.

Table 23: Extreme Networks 1200 W DC PSU front panel LED behavior

Predictive
Power Fail Fail
PSU Condition Green Amber Amber
Power supply DC outputs working normally On Off Off
DC input power present/standby output on Blinking Off Off
Current limit on 48 VDC output On Off Blinking
Predictive failure On Blinking Off
No input power to this PSU only Off Off On
No input power to any PSU Off Off Off
Power supply failure Off Off On

The front panel on each 1200 W DC PSU contains two cooling fans as shown in Figure 18. Airflow
enters from the front vents on the 1200 W DC PSU and exits to the rear vents of the switch. Airflow
through the 1200 W DC PSU is independent from the airflow that exists through the rest of the switch.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 73


Extreme Networks 1200 W DC Power Supply Units

Operating Conditions
Operating conditions for the 1200 W DC PSU(s) are as follows:

● Operating temperature range: 0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)


● Operating relative humidity: 10% to 90% relative humidity, non-condensing
● Operating altitude: 0 m to 3,000 m (0 ft to 9,850 ft)
● Operating shock*: 3 G, 11 ms, 60 shocks
● Operational office vibration*: 5-100-5 Hz @ 2/10 G, 0-peak, 1 oct/min
● Operational random vibration*: 3-500 Hz @ 1.5 G rms

* Worst case operational condition; not for continuous operation under this condition

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 74


6 BlackDiamond Cable Management

This chapter describes:

● Overview on page 75
● Using the Cable Clips and Cable Holders on page 76

Overview
This chapter describes interlocking cable holders and cable clips and how to use them to manage the
cables installed on your Extreme Networks BlackDiamond switch. You can use the cable holders and
cable clips individually or connect them together to manage multiple cable bundles.

The cable holders and cable clips, as shown in Figure 22, provide a free-standing, rigid structural
support for masses of cables. In addition, the equipment keeps all your cables collected in one place,
rather than all just hanging free. Finally, if you must remove a module from the chassis for replacement
or repair, the cable clips and holders maintain the cables for the modules for ease of connection when
you reinsert the module.

Figure 22: BlackDiamond Cable Management System

Interlocking
cable holder
and cable clips

Cable
clips

Cable
holder
Side view
ENIN005A

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 75


BlackDiamond Cable Management

Using the Cable Clips and Cable Holders


This section describes how to insert the cables into the clips and holders and how to attach several clips
or several holders together.

Using Both Cable Holders and Cable Clips


If you are using both the cable holders and the cable clips, Extreme Networks recommends the
following:

1 Attach the cables to the holders by slipping the cable through the opening.
2 Connect the cable holders, if you need more than one. (Refer to “Connecting the Cable Holders or
Cable Clips”.)
3 Thread the cables through the clips.
4 Connect the clips, if you need more than one. (Refer to “Connecting the Cable Holders or Cable
Clips”.)

Connecting the Cable Holders or Cable Clips


This section show you how to connect together either the:
● Cable holders
● Cable clips

To connect the cable holders:

1 Slide the ends together (see Figure 23).


Ensure that one protruding tab at the join is on top and the other is on the bottom.

Figure 23: Connecting Cable Holders

ENIN003

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 76


Using the Cable Clips and Cable Holders

2 Press gently together until the connectors lock into place (see Figure 24).
You will hear a soft click.
3 Connect as many cable holders together as you need to manage your cable bundles.

Figure 24: Connected Cable Holders

ENIN004

4 To disconnect the holders, grasp one in each hand firmly and gently pull apart.

To connect the cable clips:

1 Slide the ends together (see Figure 25).

Figure 25: Connecting Cable Clips

ENIN001

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 77


BlackDiamond Cable Management

2 Press together until the connectors lock into place (see Figure 26).

Figure 26: Cable Clip Chain

ENIN002

3 Connect as many cable clips together as you need to manage your cable bundles.
4 To disconnect the cable clips, gently push on the bottom ring while holding the top ring steady.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 78


3 BlackDiamond 8800 Series of Switches
7 BlackDiamond 8806 Chassis

This chapter describes:


● Minimum Software Required on page 81
● Safety Information on page 81
● BlackDiamond 8806 Architecture on page 87
● BlackDiamond 8806 Chassis Front View on page 88
● BlackDiamond 8806 Chassis Rear View on page 89
● Additional BlackDiamond 8806 Chassis Information on page 89

NOTE
Save the configuration using the save configuration command prior to moving an MSM from a BlackDiamond 8810
chassis to a BlackDiamond 8806 chassis. If you do not, you will see an error message in log when you boot up the
BlackDiamond 8806 chassis; there is no problem with either the chassis or the card. (PD3-39507416)

Safety Information

WARNING!
Correct lifting procedures for the BlackDiamond 8806 chassis requires two or more people.

Service to all BlackDiamond equipment should be performed by trained service personnel only. Please
read all important safety information prior to installation or removal. See Appendix A for additional
information regarding regulatory compliance certifications applicable to the BlackDiamond 8806 chassis.

WARNING!
The BlackDiamond 8806 chassis should be empty before being lifted. This will also prevent damage to the system
components due to possible system chassis flex when lifting.

Minimum Software Required

Physical Identification
Customers running versions of XOS below 11.3.X may experience difficulties with a variety of 6-slot
chassis features. A show version of an 8806 chassis running XOS versions below 11.3.X will indicate in
the output that it is a 10-slot chassis, and will show several open slots even though the 6-slot chassis is
fully loaded. See Table 24 below for detail.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 81


BlackDiamond 8806 Chassis

NOTE
The table below is a Show Version output from a 6-slot chassis running XOS version below 11.3.X. Note the
command line prompt says “8810” (indicating a 10 slot chassis) and there are only six populated slots.

Table 24: Show Version from a 6-Slot Chassis running XOS below 11.3.X

* Aspen-8810.3 # show version

Chassis : 804023-00-01 0450x-00006 Rev 1.0


Slot-1 : 800115-00-02 04344-00004 Rev 2.0 BootROM: 1.0.1.1 IMG: 11.1.1.9
Slot-2 : 800115-00-02 04344-00007 Rev 2.0 BootROM: 1.0.1.1 IMG: 11.1.1.9
Slot-3 : 800116-00-01 0410Z-00001 Rev 1.0 BootROM: 1.0.1.1 IMG: 11.1.1.9
Slot-4 : 800115-00-02 04344-00035 Rev 2.0 BootROM: 1.0.1.1 IMG: 11.1.1.9
Slot-5 : 800112-00-08 05105-02189 Rev 8.0 BootROM: 1.0.1.1 IMG: 11.1.1.9
Slot-6 : 800112-00-02 04224-00013 Rev 2.0 BootROM: 1.0.1.1 IMG: 11.1.1.9
Slot-7 :
Slot-8 :
Slot-9 :
Slot-10 :
MSM-A : 800112-00-08 05105-02189 Rev 8.0 BootROM: 1.0.1.1 IMG: 11.1.1.9
MSM-B : 800112-00-02 04224-00013 Rev 2.0 BootROM: IMG: 11.1.1.9
PSUCTRL-1 : 450117-00-02 04254-00070 Rev 2.0 BootROM: 2.10 IMG:
PSUCTRL-2 : 450117-00-03 05055-02587 Rev 3.0 BootROM: 2.10 IMG:

Image : ExtremeWare XOS version 11.1.1.9 v1111b9 by release-manager


on Fri Dec 10 02:20:37 PST 2004

Instructions
Customers experiencing this condition are advised to upgrade their XOS version to a minimum 11.3.X
and their Bootloader Image Version to a minimum 1.0.1.7. Instructions on how to do this are shown
below.

For Customers Upgrading from 11.2 to 11.3


Customers attempting to install an MSM-G8 programmed with XOS 11.2.X may upgrade to 11.3.X using
the standard XOS upgrade process.

For Customers Upgrading from 11.1 to 11.3


Customers attempting to install an MSM-G8 with XOS version at 11.1.X level must upgrade to 11.3.X:

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 82


Minimum Software Required

1 After chassis boots up, download a version of 11.3.X to the chassis. These steps are shown below.

NOTE
Do not allow installation of firmware during the download process. Answer “No” when prompted “Installing
version 1.0.1.7 of the MSM bootrom(s). Do you want to continue? (y/n)”

Extreme Networks

Default BootLoader Image

Running Power On Self Test ...Passed

Copyright 2003, Extreme Networks, Inc.

BootStrap : Aspen MSM Alternate BootStrap Image version: 1.0.1.1


BootLoader: Aspen MSM Default BootLoader Image version: 1.0.1.1

Press and hold the <spacebar> to enter the bootrom.

Boot path is /dev/fat/wd0a/vmlinux (elf)


0x85000000/18368 + 0x85006000/6500352 + 0x85639000/12752(z) + 91 syms

Running image boot...

Starting Extremeware XOS 11.1.1b9


Copyright (C) 1996-2004 Extreme Networks. All rights reserved.

Protected by U.S. Patents 6,678,248; 6,104,700; 6,766,482; 6,618,388; 6,034,957

login: admin

password:

ExtremeWare XOS
Copyright (C) 2000-2004 Extreme Networks. All rights reserved.
Protected by US Patents 6,678,248; 6,104,700; 6,766,482; 6,618,388; 6,034,957.
==============================================================================

Press the <tab> or '?' key at any time for completions.


Remember to save your configuration changes.

* Aspen-8810.1 # config vlan mgmt ipaddress 10.66.3.5/24


IP interface for VLAN Mgmt has been created.

* Aspen-8810.2 # config ipr add def 10.66.3.1 vr "VR-Mgmt"

* Aspen-8810.3 # download image 10.66.9.2 aspen-11.3.0.7.xos


Do you want to install image after downloading? (y - yes, n - no, <cr> - cancel)
Yes

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 83


BlackDiamond 8806 Chassis

Downloading to MSM-A......................................................

Image will be installed to the active partition, a reboot required. Do you want
to continue? (y/n) Yes
Do you want to save configuration changes to primary.cfg? (y or n) No
Installing to primary partition!

Installing to MSM-A.........................................................
............................................................................
............................................................................
............................................................................
............................................................
Image installed successfully

Installing version 1.0.1.7 of the MSM bootrom(s). Do you want to continue? (y/n)
No

2 Allow XOS to reboot the chassis. Details are shown below.

Extreme Networks

Default BootLoader Image

Running Power On Self Test ...Passed

Copyright 2003, Extreme Networks, Inc.

BootStrap : Aspen MSM Alternate BootStrap Image version: 1.0.1.1


BootLoader: Aspen MSM Default BootLoader Image version: 1.0.1.1

Press and hold the <spacebar> to enter the bootrom.

Boot path is /dev/fat/wd0a/vmlinux (elf)


0x85000000/18368 + 0x85006000/2928640 + 0x852d1000/12752(z) + 91 syms
Running image boot...

Starting Extremeware XOS 11.3.0b7


Copyright (C) 1996-2005 Extreme Networks. All rights reserved.
Protected by US Patent Nos: 6,678,248; 6,104,700; 6,766,482; 6,618,388; 6,034,95

3 Upgrade the Bootloader Image version to minimum 1.0.1.7. by executing the steps below.

login: admin
password:

ExtremeWare XOS
Copyright (C) 2000-2005 Extreme Networks. All rights reserved.
Protected by US Patent Nos: 6,678,248; 6,104,700; 6,766,482; 6,618,388; 6,034,95
================================================================================

Press the <tab> or '?' key at any time for completions.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 84


Minimum Software Required

Remember to save your configuration changes.

This switch currently has all management methods enabled for security reasons.
Please answer these questions about the security settings you would like to use.

Telnet is enabled by default. Telnet is unencrypted and has been the target of
security exploits in the past.

Would you like to disable Telnet? [y/N]: Yes


Disabling telnet access ... done

SNMP access is enabled by default. SNMP uses no encryption, SNMPv3 can be


configured to eliminate this problem.

Would you like to disable SNMP? [y/N]: Yes


Disabling all SNMP access ... done

All ports are enabled by default. In some secure applications, it maybe more
desirable for the ports to be turned off.

Would you like unconfigured ports to be turned off by default? [y/N]: Yes
Disabling all ports ... done

* BD-8806.1 # install firmware


Installing version 1.0.1.7 of the MSM bootrom(s), a reboot is required. Do you want
to continue?

(y - yes, n - no, <cr> - cancel) Yes


Do you want to save configuration changes to primary.cfg? (y or n) No
Installing bootrom...

MSM bootrom(s) installed successfully

4 Allow the system to reboot. After reboot is complete, verify that Bootloader Image and XOS image is
correct.

The system is going down NOW !!


Sending SIGTERM to all processelogin: Sending SIGKILL t

Extreme Networks

Default BootLoader Image

Running Power On Self Test ...Passed

Press and hold the <spacebar> to enter the bootrom.

Copyright 2003, Extreme Networks, Inc.

BootStrap : MSM Alternate BootStrap Image version: 1.0.1.7

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 85


BlackDiamond 8806 Chassis

BootLoader: MSM Default BootLoader Image version: 1.0.1.7

NOTE
BootStrap and Bootloader images above are both at the correct level (minimum 1.0.1.7).

Booting Primary XOS image(elf)


0x85000000/18368 + 0x85006000/2928640 + 0x852d1000/12752(z) + 91 syms
Running image boot...

Starting Extremeware XOS 11.3.0b7

NOTE
The line above confirms that XOS has been successfully upgraded to 11.3.X.

Copyright (C) 1996-2005 Extreme Networks. All rights reserved.


Protected by US Patent Nos: 6,678,248; 6,104,700; 6,766,482; 6,618,388; 6,034,95

login: admin
password:

ExtremeWare XOS
Copyright (C) 2000-2005 Extreme Networks. All rights reserved.
Protected by US Patent Nos: 6,678,248; 6,104,700; 6,766,482; 6,618,388; 6,034,95

================================================================================

Press the <tab> or '?' key at any time for completions.


Remember to save your configuration changes.

This switch currently has all management methods enabled for security reasons.
Please answer these questions about the security settings you would like to use.

Telnet is enabled by default. Telnet is unencrypted and has been the target of
security exploits in the past.

Would you like to disable Telnet? [y/N]: No

SNMP access is enabled by default. SNMP uses no encryption, SNMPv3 can be


configured to eliminate this problem.

Would you like to disable SNMP? [y/N]: Yes


Disabling all SNMP access ... done

All ports are enabled by default. In some secure applications, it maybe more

desirable for the ports to be turned off.

Would you like unconfigured ports to be turned off by default? [y/N]: Yes

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 86


BlackDiamond 8806 Architecture

Disabling all ports ... done

Since you have chosen less secure management methods, please remember to
increase the security of your network by taking the following actions:

* change your admin password


* change your SNMP public and private strings
* consider using SNMPv3 to secure network management traffic

* BD-8806.1 # show slot


Slots Type Configured State Ports Flags
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Slot-1 Empty 0
Slot-2 Empty 0
Slot-3 G8X Booting 8 S
Slot-4 Empty 0
Slot-5 Empty 0
Slot-6 Empty 0
MSM-A MSM-G8X Operational 0 S
MSM-B Empty 0

Flags : M - Backplane link to Master MSM is Active


B - Backplane link to Backup MSM is also Active
D - Slot Disabled, S - Slot Secured
I - Insufficient Power (refer to "show power budget")
* BD-8806.2 #

The upgrade verification process is now complete because:

● XOS is at the correct version.


● BootLoader is at the correct version.
● Separate verification of the chassis configuration shows the correct number of populated slots.
● Command line prompt now indicates 8806.

NOTE
The command line prompt will only change to BD-8806 if it has not already been changed in the config.

BlackDiamond 8806 Architecture


This section describes and shows the architecture of the BlackDiamond 8806 chassis:
● BlackDiamond 8806 Chassis Front View on page 88
● BlackDiamond 8806 Chassis Rear View on page 89

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 87


BlackDiamond 8806 Chassis

BlackDiamond 8806 Chassis Front View


The BlackDiamond 8806 chassis consists of the following components:

● One 6-slot chassis with backplane


● Four dedicated I/O module slots (labeled 1 through 2 and 5 through 6)
● Two dual use I/O module/MSM slots (labeled 3/A and 4/B; at least one of the dual use slots must
contain an MSM)
● Up to six power supplies (accessed from the front of the unit)
● One fan tray (accessed from the front right of the unit)
● One ESD-preventive wrist strap connector

When two MSMs are installed, the chassis can support up to 48 Gig bandwidth per slot.

Figure 27 shows the BlackDiamond 8806 chassis installed with two MSMs and three optional I/O
modules.

Figure 27: Front view of the BlackDiamond 8806 chassis

ESD wrist strap Fan tray


connector

I/O module
slots

MSM module slot

I/O module
slots

Power supplies

Power cord
connectors
EX_127

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 88


BlackDiamond 8806 Chassis Rear View

BlackDiamond 8806 Chassis Rear View


Figure 28 shows the rear view of the BlackDiamond 8806 chassis.

Figure 28: Rear view of the BlackDiamond 8806 chassis

PSU / fan
controllers

Grounding lug

EX_128

The rear of the BlackDiamond 8806 chassis provides:


● The chassis serial number
● The Ethernet MAC address of the switch
● Symbols of safety certification
● Access to the PSU/fan controllers

Additional BlackDiamond 8806 Chassis Information


Refer to the following chapters for further information about your BlackDiamond 8806 chassis:
● “BlackDiamond 8800 Series and BlackDiamond 12804 Blank Front Panels” on page 149
● “Additional BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis Information” on page 153
■ Uncrating and Unpacking the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Chassis on page 154
■ Rack Mounting the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Chassis on page 156
■ BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Mid-Mount Kit and Mid-Mount Racking on page 162
● “BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804 Fan Tray” on page 167
● “BlackDiamond 8800 Series and BlackDiamond 12804 PSU/Fan Controller” on page 171
● “BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804 AC Power Cord Retainer Channel Bracket” on
page 175

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 89


BlackDiamond 8806 Chassis

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 90


8 BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis

This chapter describes the chassis of the BlackDiamond 8810 switch:


● BlackDiamond 8810 Architecture on page 91
● Safety Information on page 91
● BlackDiamond 8810 Family Chassis Front View on page 92
● BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis Rear View on page 93
● Uncrating and Unpacking the BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis on page 93
● Pre-Installation Requirements
● Assembling the BlackDiamond 8810 Mid-Mount Kit
● Rack Mounting the BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis
● Recrating and Repacking the BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis on page 100

BlackDiamond 8810 Architecture


This section describes and shows the architecture of the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis:
● BlackDiamond 8810 Family Chassis Front View on page 92
● BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis Rear View on page 93

Safety Information

WARNING!
Correct lifting procedures for the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis requires two or more people.

Service to all BlackDiamond equipment should be performed by trained service personnel only. Please
read all important safety information prior to installation or removal. See Appendix A for additional
information regarding regulatory compliance certifications applicable to the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis.

WARNING!
The BlackDiamond 8810 chassis should be empty before being lifted. This will also prevent damage to the system
components due to possible system chassis flex when lifting.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 91


BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis

BlackDiamond 8810 Family Chassis Front View


The BlackDiamond 8810 chassis consists of the following components:
● One 10-slot chassis with backplane
● Eight dedicated I/O module slots (labeled 1 through 4 and 7 through 10)
● Two dual use I/O module/MSM slots (labeled 5/A and 6/B; at least one of the dual use slots must
contain an MSM)
● Up to six power supplies (accessed from the front of the unit)
● One fan tray (accessed from the front right of the unit)
● One ESD-preventive wrist strap connector

When two MSMs are installed, the chassis can support up to 48 Gig per slot.

Figure 29 shows the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis installed with two MSMs and three optional I/O
modules.

Figure 29: Front view of the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis

ESD wrist strap


connector
Fan tray

I/O module slots

MSM module slot

I/O module slots

Power supplies

Power cord
connectors

ASP042

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 92


BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis Rear View

BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis Rear View


Figure 30 shows the rear view of the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis.

Figure 30: Rear view of the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis

PSU/Fan
controllers

Grounding lug

The rear of the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis provides:


● The chassis serial number
● The Ethernet MAC address of the switch
● Symbols of safety certification
● Access to the PSU/fan controllers

Uncrating and Unpacking the BlackDiamond 8810


Chassis
This section describes how to uncrate, unpack, and rack mount the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis. Re-
crating and re-packing instructions are also provided in the event that the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis
needs to be returned to Extreme Networks, Inc.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 93


BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis

To ensure proper uncrating and unpacking for the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis:
1 Ensure that the Tilt Watch and Shock Watch indicators display a white state condition as shown in
Figure 31.

Figure 31: Tilt watch and shock watch indicators

Tilt watch Shock watch

Tilt watch Shock watch


in white state in white state

Tilt watch Shock watch


in red state in red state

EX_084

CAUTION
Do not proceed with uncrating and unpacking the chassis if either the Tilt Indicator or the Shock Indicator is
displaying a red state condition. Immediately contact Extreme Networks should a red condition occur.

2 Remove the contents from the BlackDiamond 8810 shipping carton (see Figure 32).

Figure 32: Removing contents from the BlackDiamond 8810 shipping carton

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 94


Uncrating and Unpacking the BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis

3 Release the clip locks as shown in Figure 33.


a Place your thumb and index finger inside the clip lock touching the prongs.
b Squeeze the prongs inward applying equal pressure on each side.
c Pull the prongs outward until the clip lock is released from the carton.
d Repeat steps 3a through 3c to release each of the remaining clip locks.

Figure 33: Clip locks located on BlackDiamond 8810 shipping carton

Squeeze prongs
to unlock

Clip lock
Open
lock

EX_087

4 Slide the BlackDiamond 8810 shipping carton up over the chassis.


5 Remove all four restraining bolts that hold the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis to the four shipping
brackets on the shipping pallet (see Figure 34).

Figure 34: Restraining bolts holding the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis onto the wood pallet

Lift box
off
chassis

Remove 4 bolts
holding chassis
to pallet

ASP016B

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 95


BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis

6 Using each person, place one hand in the empty power supply bay and the other hand in the rear
slot on the back panel of the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis.

WARNING!
Correct lifting procedures for the chassis requires two or more people.

WARNING!
The BlackDiamond 8810 chassis should be empty before being lifted. This will also prevent damage to the system
components due to possible chassis flex when lifting.

7 Gently lift the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis off of the shipping pallet and onto the floor as shown in
Figure 35.

Figure 35: Correct method for lifting the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis

ASP017A

NOTE
Save all packaging, bolts, washers, clip locks, and box for future use in the event that the chassis needs to be
moved to another location or returned to Extreme Networks.

Pre-Installation Requirements
The following tools and equipment are required for assembling the BlackDiamond 8810 mid-mount kit
and racking the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis:
● ESD-preventive wrist strap
● #2 Phillips screwdriver
● Screws to mount BlackDiamond 8810 chassis (for use with #2 Phillips screwdriver)
● 19” helper bracket
● BlackDiamond 8810 mid-mount kit
● BlackDiamond 8810 chassis
● A minimum of two people to help install the chassis into the rack.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 96


Assembling the BlackDiamond 8810 Mid-Mount Kit

Assembling the BlackDiamond 8810 Mid-Mount Kit


To assemble the BlackDiamond 8810 mid-mount kit:
1 Using two or more people, place the empty chassis in an upright position on a secure flat surface.

2 Attach the right and left mid-mount bracket to each corresponding side of the chassis using eight
mount screws as shown in Figure 36.

Figure 36: Right and left mid-mount brackets attached to the BlackDiamond chassis

Mid-Mount
Bracket

ASP034

NOTE
Each mid-mount bracket is clearly marked as right and left as viewed from the front of the chassis.

NOTE
Each side of the chassis has two vertical linear hole sets to allow for mount position flexibility when attaching the
right and left mid-mount brackets to the chassis.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 97


BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis

Rack Mounting the BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis


To ensure proper rack mounting for the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis:
1 Locate the 19” helper bracket that is shipped with the chassis.
2 Mount the 19” helper bracket onto the system rack using four mount screws as shown in Figure 37.

Figure 37: Mounting the 19” helper bracket onto the system rack

EX_008

EX_086

3 Lift the back of the empty chassis onto the 19” helper bracket.
4 Slowly guide the chassis onto the system rack until the chassis is securely seated.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 98


Rack Mounting the BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis

5 Mount the chassis onto the system rack using eight rack system mount screws (screws not
provided). Refer to Figure 38 for the screw mounting locations

NOTE
The screw slots used for correct system mounting are located in the same positions on the standard brackets
(front of chassis) and on the mid-mount brackets. Figure 38 shows the standard mount location.

Figure 38: Securing the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis to a standard rack system

EX_171
EX_172

6 Remove the 19” helper bracket from the system rack once the chassis is secured.

NOTE
For information regarding gage size requirements for chassis grounding wires, refer to “Protective Grounding for the
Rack” on page 24 inside of Chapter 1, “Site Preparation.”

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 99


BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis

Recrating and Repacking the BlackDiamond 8810


Chassis
To ensure proper recrating and repacking for the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis:
1 Mount the 19” helper bracket into the system rack using four mount screws.
2 Loosen the eight mount screws holding the chassis from the system rack using a #2 Phillips
screwdriver.
3 Using two people, place one hand in the empty power supply bay and the other hand in the rear
slot on the back panel of the chassis.
4 Slowly guide the chassis out from the system rack using the 19” helper bracket.
5 Gently lift the chassis off from the 19” helper bracket onto wood pallet as shown in Figure 39.

Figure 39: Correct method for lifting the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis

ASP017A

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 100


Recrating and Repacking the BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis

6 Attach all four restraining bolts to the four shipping brackets, securing the BlackDiamond 8810
chassis to the shipping pallet (see Figure 40).

Figure 40: Restraining bolts holding the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis onto the wood pallet

Slide carton
down over
chassis

Install 4 bolts
securing chassis
to pallet

ASP016A

7 Slide the BlackDiamond 8810 shipping carton down over the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis.
8 Insert the clip locks as shown in Figure 41.
a Place your thumb and index finger inside the clip lock touching the prongs.
b Squeeze the prongs inward applying equal pressure on each side.
c Push the prongs inward until the clip lock is secured onto the carton.
d Repeat steps 8a through 8c to insert each of the remaining clip locks.

Figure 41: Clip locks located on BlackDiamond 8810 shipping carton

Squeeze prongs
to unlock

Clip lock
Close
lock

EX_087A

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 101


BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis

9 Place the contents back into the BlackDiamond 8810 shipping carton as shown in Figure 42.

Figure 42: Placing contents back into the BlackDiamond 8810 shipping carton

ASP024

10 Close the top flaps on the BlackDiamond 8810 shipping carton.


11 Seal the top flaps of the BlackDiamond 8810 shipping carton with packing tape.
12 Secure the BlackDiamond 8810 shipping carton with nylon straps as shown in Figure 43.

Figure 43: BlackDiamond 8810 shipping carton with nylon straps

ASP026

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 102


9 BlackDiamond 8800 MSM and I/O Modules

This chapter describes modules for the BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches:
● Management Switch Module (MSM) on page 103
● MSM LEDs on page 106
● I/O Modules on page 107
● I/O Module LEDs on page 111
● Installing MSM and I/O Modules in the BlackDiamond 8800 Series of Switches on page 112
● Removing an MSM or I/O Module from the BlackDiamond 8800 Series of Switches on page 116
● BlackDiamond 8800/12804 Blank Front Panels on page 117

NOTE
Read the information in this chapter thoroughly before you attempt to install or remove the MSM or any I/O modules
on the BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches.

CAUTION
Do not attempt to mix and match modules across Extreme Networks product lines. BlackDiamond 8800 series
modules are for use in a BlackDiamond 8800 series switch only, such as a BlackDiamond 8810 or BlackDiamond
8806 switch. When a BlackDiamond 8800 series switch is in use, ExtremeXOS software will not recognize a module
from a different product line. Attempting to install an incorrect module type will cause the following error message
to display, "Unable to read cardtype for slot X."

Management Switch Module (MSM)


This section contains the following information on the G8X MSM:
● Overview on page 103
● Slots for BlackDiamond 8800 MSMs on page 105
● Data Ports on the G8X MSM on page 105
● MSM Activity on page 105

Overview
The G8X Management Switch Module (MSM) for the BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches holds both
the control plane and the switch fabric for the switch. One MSM is required for switch operation;
however, adding an additional MSM to the chassis increases reliability and throughput. Each G8X MSM
also contains a temperature sensor, nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM), and a real-time
clock.

The G8X MSM also has eight data I/O ports. See “Data Ports on the G8X MSM” for information on
these ports.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 103


BlackDiamond 8800 MSM and I/O Modules

The BlackDiamond 8800 MSM provides the active switching fabric and CPU control subsystem. Each
G8X MSM provides 192 Gbps of switching throughput through three ASICs.

Figure 44 shows the front view of the G8X MSM.

Figure 44: G8X MSM faceplate

Module status LEDs


SYS/STA ERR
MSTR/DIAG ENV

Mini-GBIC
fiber ports

Compact flash

Console port
MGMT port

A
D
R
ASP038

The MSM consists of a printed circuit board mounted on a metal panel that acts as the insertion vehicle
in the BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches. The module carrier also includes ejector/injector levers
and captive retaining screws at each end of the module front panel.

The G8X MSM has the following ports:


● Console port—The DB9 serial console port is used to connect a terminal allowing you to perform
local management.
● Management port—The 10/100 Mbps Ethernet management port allows you to connect an Ethernet
cable directly from your laptop into the management port to view and locally manage the switch
configurations. This port can also be used to connect the system into a parallell management
network for administration.
● Compact flash—You can insert an external compact flash memory card into this port. (See Chapter 3
for more information on Extreme Networks-supported compact flash cards.)
● Eight SFP fiber mini-GBIC data ports—These data ports operate as they do on any other I/O
module.

Additionally, the G8X MSM has the following three buttons:


● A—Use the A button to select the alternate BootROM image when powering-on the G8X MSM
module. To use the alternate BootROM image, you must hold the A button while pressing the R
button simultaneously.
● D—Use the D button of force a system dump. This dumps the debug information into NVRAM; this
information is available on the next reboot. No core file is created.
● R—Use the R button to reset the G8X MSM without removing the module from the chassis.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 104


Management Switch Module (MSM)

Slots for BlackDiamond 8800 MSMs

NOTE
The BlackDiamond series of switches can operate with a single management switch module or with two MSMs for
redundancy, better reliability, and better throughput.

MSMs reside in different slots depending on which BlackDiamond switch you operate:
● If you are using only one G8X MSM in the BlackDiamond 8806 switch, install that MSM in slot 3. If
you want to use two MSMs to increase reliability and throughput, install the second MSM in slot 4.
● If you are using only one G8X MSM in the BlackDiamond 8810 switch, install that MSM in slot 5. If
you want to use two MSMs to increase reliability and throughput, install the second MSM in slot 6.

See “Installing MSM and I/O Modules in the BlackDiamond 8800 Series of Switches” on page 112 for
information on how to install a G8X MSM.

Data Ports on the G8X MSM


The G8X MSM has eight SFP fiber mini-GBIC data ports. MSM data ports operate the same as the ports
on the G24X (see “G24X Module” on page 107 for more information on these ports).

The eight data ports are integrated into the MSM and managed by a separate I/O processor, which
retains control of the eight Ethernet ports on the MSM during a failover. The backup MSM can take
control of the ports.

NOTE
See the ExtremeXOS Concepts Guide and the ExtremeXOS Command Reference Guide for more information about
numbering conventions for the modules and ports, as well as configuration and display information.

MSM Activity
The BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches can run with a single MSM installed. When you install an
additional MSM, one of the MSMs operates as the primary, and the other becomes the secondary or
backup.

The primary MSM is responsible for upper-layer protocol processing and system management
functions. Packet handling is distributed among the CPUs of all installed MSMs.

When you save the switch configuration, it is saved to all MSMs.

Selection of the primary MSM occurs automatically. The following scenarios describe the selection
process:
● When a switch boots with two MSMs installed, the MSM in slot 5 becomes the primary in the
BlackDiamond 8810 switch. For the BlackDiamond 8806 switch, Slot 3 operates as the primary.
If an additional MSM is added to the switch after it has been powered-up, the added MSM becomes
the secondary. MSMs that operate as secondary, or backup, MSMs can be inserted and removed
without disrupting network services.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 105


BlackDiamond 8800 MSM and I/O Modules

● If you remove the primary MSM while the switch is operating, the secondary MSM performs a soft
reset and then becomes the primary MSM.
For example, if you have a BlackDiamond 8810 switch with a primary MSM in slot 5 and a
secondary MSM in slot 6, and you remove the primary MSM from slot 5, the secondary, or backup,
MSM in slot 6 becomes the primary.
In a BlackDiamond 8806 switch, with a primary MSM in slot 3 and a secondary MSM in slot 4, and
you remove the primary MSM from slot 4, the secondary, or backup, MSM in slot 4 becomes the
primary.

MSM LEDs
Table 25 describes the LED activity on the G8X MSM.

Table 25: G8X MSM LEDs


LED Color Indicates
SYS/STA Green blinking Normal operation is occurring.
Amber blinking The status LED flashes amber while diagnostic tests are running on the
module. If a diagnostic test fails, the status LED becomes solid amber. The
LED resets if the diagnostics are terminated. The LED returns to flashing
amber if another diagnostic test is started.
Amber Diagnostic failure has occurred.
Off Switch is not receiving power.
MSTR/ Green Module is operating as primary MSM.
DIAG
Amber Module is operating as secondary, or backup, MSM.
Green blinking Power-On Self-Test (POST) is running.
Off Normal operation for diagnostics.
ERR Amber A critical software error has been logged since power-up.
Off Normal operation is occurring.
ENV Green Environment (temperature, fan, power supply) is operating properly.
Amber Environmental failure has occurred.
Link on Green Link is up.
MSTR
Off Link is down.
Ethernet
port
Activity Amber Packet activity is occurring.
on MSTR

NOTE
The LEDs on the management Ethernet port are not labeled. The LED on the right is the link LED, and the one on
the left is the activity LED.

NOTE
The data port LEDs on the G8X MSM operate the same as the port status LEDs on the G24X I/O module.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 106


I/O Modules

I/O Modules
This section describes the I/O modules for the BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches, including:
● G24X Module on page 107
● 10G4X Module on page 108
● G48T Module on page 109
● G48P Module on page 110

No configuration information is stored on the I/O modules; all configuration information is stored on
the MSM(s).

When a BlackDiamond 8800 switch is powered on, the software generates a default configuration for
any slots that contain I/O modules. The default configuration allows the I/O module ports to
participate in the VLAN named default. The default configuration for the I/O module is not preserved
unless you explicitly save the configuration to NVRAM.

You can configure parameters of the I/O module after it is installed, or preconfigure a slot for a certain
type of module and configuration. The preconfigured information is applied to the module after it is
inserted. If you preconfigure a slot for a specific module type and then insert a different type of module,
the module reverts to its default configuration.

NOTE
See the ExtremeXOS Concepts Guide and the ExtremeXOS Command Reference Guide for more information about
configuring the modules.

G24X Module
Figure 45 shows the G24X module.

Figure 45: G24X module

Module status LEDs

1000BASE-X
ports

ASP041

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 107


BlackDiamond 8800 MSM and I/O Modules

All Gigabit Ethernet ports on this module use SPF fiber mini-GBIC connectors.

The default configuration of the G24X module is as follows. All ports:


● Are added to the default VLAN as untagged
● Inherit the properties of the default VLAN (for example, protocol type and VLANid)

G24X LEDs
The G24X module has the following LEDs:
● Module status
● Module diagnostics
● Port status

For information about the LEDs and their activity on the G24X module, see “I/O Module LEDs” on
page 111.

10G4X Module
Figure 46 shows the 10G4X module.

Figure 46: 10G4X module

Module status LEDs

10 Gbs ports

ASP040

The 10G4X module has four unpopulated XENPAK-based 10 Gigabit Ethernet ports.

The default configuration of the 10G4X module is as follows. All ports:


● Are added to the default VLAN as untagged.
● Inherit the properties of the default VLAN (for example, protocol type and VLANid)

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 108


I/O Modules

10G4X LEDs
The 10G4X module has the following LEDs:
● Module status
● Module diagnostics
● Port status

For information about the LEDs and their activity on the 10G6X module, see “I/O Module LEDs” on
page 111.

G48T Module
Figure 47 shows the G48T module.

Figure 47: G48T module

Module status LEDs

10/100/1000BASE-T
ports

ASP037

The G48T module has 48 autosensing 10/100/1000BASE-T ports that use standard RJ-45 connectors.

The default configuration of the G48T module is as follows. All ports:


● Are added to the default VLAN as untagged
● Inherit the properties of the default VLAN (for example, protocol type and VLANid)
● Operate in autonegotiation mode

G48T LEDs
The G48T module has the following LEDs:
● Module status
● Module diagnostics
● Port status

For information about the LEDs and their activity on the G48T module, see “I/O Module LEDs” on
page 111.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 109


BlackDiamond 8800 MSM and I/O Modules

G48P Module
Figure 48 shows the G48P module.

Figure 48: G48P module

Module status LEDs

10/100/1000BASE-T
PoE ports

ASP039

The G48P module has 48 autosensing 10/100/1000BASE-T ports that use standard RJ-45 connectors and
that can deliver Power over Ethernet (PoE) to an attached device as well as the usual Ethernet
connection, provided by one cable. The G48P module supports the IEEE 892.3af PoE specification.

When powered devices (PDs) are connected to a port, the PDs are discovered and classified as 802.3af-
compliant or as legacy devices. ExtremeXOS implements the following functions:
● Enables the port for discovery, classification, and power delivery
● Enforces port power limits by denying power to a device exceeding the configured limit
● Enforces class limits by denying power to a device exceeding the class limit
● Reports and tracks port power faults

The default configuration of the G48P module is as follows. All ports:


● Are added to the default VLAN as untagged
● Inherit the properties of the default VLAN (for example, protocol type and VLANid)
● Operate in autonegotiation mode

G48P LEDs
The G48P module has the following LEDs:
● Module status
● Module diagnostics
● Port status
● Power status

For information about the LEDs and their activity on the G48P module, see “I/O Module LEDs” on
page 111.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 110


I/O Module LEDs

I/O Module LEDs


This section describes the LEDs for the module, for the port and for inline power delivery status for I/O
modules in the BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches.

NOTE
The inline power delivery applies only to the G48P ports on the BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches.

Module LEDs
Table 26 describes the LED activity for I/O modules in the BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches.

Table 26: BlackDiamond 8810 switch Ethernet I/O module LEDs


LED Color Indicates
Status Green blinking Normal operation
Amber blinking Configuration error, code version error, diagnostic failure, or
other severe module error
Off No power
DIAG Off Normal operation
Amber blinking Diagnostics in progress
Amber Diagnostic failure

Port LEDs
This section describes the port LEDs for the G24X, G48T, G48P, and 10G4X modules.

G24X, 10G4X, and G48T Port LEDs


Table 27 describes the LED activity on the G24X, G48T, and 10G4X modules for each port.

Table 27: Port LEDs for the G24X, G48T, and 10G4X modules
LED Color Indicates
Port Solid green Link up
Slow green blinking Port disabled
Amber blinking Activity
Off Link down

G48P Port LEDs


The port LEDs on the PoE module (G48P) also indicate the status of the inline power delivered through
the ports.

Table 28 describes the LED activity on the G48P module for each port.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 111


BlackDiamond 8800 MSM and I/O Modules

Table 28: Port LEDs for the G48P module


LED Color Indicates
Port with power enabled Solid amber Link up
Slow amber blinking Port disabled
Amber blinking Activity
Slow amber blinking Link down
Blinking amber/green Power fault or insufficient power
Port with power disabled Solid green Link up
Slow green blinking Port disabled
Green blinking Activity
Off Link down
Blinking amber/green Power fault or insufficient power

Installing MSM and I/O Modules in the BlackDiamond


8800 Series of Switches

NOTE
You do not need to power the system off to install a module in a switch from the BlackDiamond 8800 family.

This section describes important safety information and correct procedures for installing a MSM or I/O
module in the BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches. All module types are hot-swappable. This section
describes the following topics:
● Pre-Installation Requirements on page 112
● Distinguishing a BlackDiamond 8800 MSM from an I/O Module on page 113
● Installing an MSM or I/O Module in the BlackDiamond 8800 Series of Switches on page 114
● Removing an MSM or I/O Module from the BlackDiamond 8800 Series of Switches on page 116

Pre-Installation Requirements
You will need the following tools and equipment to install a BlackDiamond 8800 MSM or I/O module:
● ESD-preventive wrist strap
● #2 Phillips screwdriver
● BlackDiamond 8806 or BlackDiamond 8810 chassis
● BlackDiamond 8800 MSM or I/O module
● BlackDiamond 8800 documentation

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 112


Installing MSM and I/O Modules in the BlackDiamond 8800 Series of Switches

Distinguishing a BlackDiamond 8800 MSM from an I/O Module


One way to distinguish a BlackDiamond 8800 MSM from a BlackDiamond 8800 I/O module is to
examine the color of the release latch located on each injector/ejector handle. Orange injector/ejector
handles indicate that the module is an MSM and green injector/ejector handles indicate that the module
is an I/O module, as shown in Figure 49.

Figure 49: Injector/ejector handle colors on BlackDiamond 8810 MSM and I/O modules

I/O module
handles are
green

MSM
handles are
orange
EX_122

NOTE
Slot 5/A on the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis and slot 3/A on the BlackDiamond 8806 chassis will run only an MSM
module.

Slot 3/A in the BlackDiamond 8806 chassis and slot 5/A in the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis can
accommodate only an MSM. All the other slots on either chassis can accommodate an I/O module.
Additionally, when you are running in dual-MSM mode, the BlackDiamond 8806 chassis will have an
MSM in both slots 3/A and 4/B and the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis will have an MSM in both slots 5/
A and 6/B. When you are running with only one MSM in the chassis, you can put I/O modules into
slot 4 on the Blackdiamond 8806 chassis and slot 6 on the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis.

NOTE
If the screw on the module handle has a red line, see part number 120263-00 Rev. 01, BlackDiamond 8810 MSM
and I/O Module Installation Note, for instructions on how to remove that module.

Figure 50: BlackDiamond 8810 chassis slots for MSM and I/O modules

Green = I/O Module

Orange = MSM

ASP023A

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 113


BlackDiamond 8800 MSM and I/O Modules

Installing an MSM or I/O Module in the BlackDiamond 8800


Series of Switches
To install an MSM or I/O module in a BlackDiamond 8810 switch or BlackDiamond 8806 switch:
1 Attach the ESD-preventive wrist strap to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground
receptacle that is located on the top-left corner of the chassis.
2 Remove the blank front panel from the chassis slot, if applicable.

NOTE
See part number 120265-00 Rev. 01, BlackDiamond 8800 Blank Front Panel Installation Note, for instructions
on how to remove blank front panels.

3 Pull the ESD bag off of the BlackDiamond 8800 MSM or I/O module:
a Place the ESD bag containing the MSM or I/O module on a flat ESD surface, clean from any
debris.
b Break the quality seal, the ESD warning seal, and the Read Installation Note seal.
c Open the ESD bag and firmly grasp the rail of the MSM or I/O module.
d Pull the ESD bag off while holding the rail of the MSM or I/O module.

CAUTION
To prevent ESD damage, hold the module by the metal rail and front panel only. Never touch the components on
the PCB or pins on any of the connectors.

4 Before inserting the MSM or I/O module, ensure that the module injector/ejector handles are open
as shown in Figure 51.

Figure 51: Injector/ejector handles are shown in opened position

EX_123

5 Slide the MSM or I/O module into the chassis slot using the injector/ejector handles in the open
position.

CAUTION
Do not slide the MSM or I/O module into the open chassis slot if the injector/ejector handles are latched.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 114


Installing MSM and I/O Modules in the BlackDiamond 8800 Series of Switches

6 Latch the injector/ejector handles, using both hands, by simultaneously pushing both handles
toward the center of the MSM or I/O module as shown in Figure 52.

Figure 52: Injector/ejector handles are shown in latched position

EX_124

CAUTION
Please note that there are two possible styles of ejector/injector handles. If the captive screws on the handles that
shipped with your system have visible signs of yellow on the stem of the captive screw, continue with the
instructions in this guide. However, if your system shipped with captive screws that show visible red lines on the
head of the captive screw, please use the instructions in the installation note that shipped with your system, P/N
120263-00.

7 Lock the MSM or I/O module into place by turning each captive screw of the injector/ejector
handles clockwise and completely down, which will eliminate all visible signs of yellow on the
captive screw. Use a # 2 Phillips screwdriver as shown in Figure 53.

CAUTION
When using a # 2 Phillips screwdriver, use caution to avoid over torquing and stripping of the screw heads.

Figure 53: Screwdriver is shown turning captive screw one-quarter turn (90 degrees)

EX_125

8 Store the BlackDiamond 8800 MSM or I/O module packaging for future use.
9 Leave the ESD-preventive wrist strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always
available when you need to touch ESD-sensitive components.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 115


BlackDiamond 8800 MSM and I/O Modules

Removing an MSM or I/O Module from the BlackDiamond 8800


Series of Switches

CAUTION
Please note that there are two possible styles of ejector/injector handles. If the captive screws on the handles that
shipped with your system have visible signs of yellow on the stem of the captive screw, continue with the
instructions in this guide. However, if your system shipped with captive screws that show visible red lines on the
head of the captive screw, please use the instructions in the installation note that shipped with your system, P/N
120263-00.

This section describes safety information and correct procedures for removing an MSM or I/O module
from the BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches. Modules for the BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches
are hot-swappable. You do not need to power the system off to remove a module.
To ensure proper removal of a BlackDiamond 8800 MSM or I/O module:
1 Attach the ESD-preventive wrist strap to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground
receptacle that is located on the top-left corner of the chassis.
2 Unlock the MSM or I/O module by turning each captive screw back counter-clockwise in both
injector/ejector handles. Use a # 2 Phillips screwdriver, as shown in Figure 54.

Figure 54: Screwdriver is shown turning captive screw to unlock module

EX_125a

3 Verify that each captive screw in both injector/ejector handles shows the yellow on the stem
completely. This position ensures that the MSM or I/O module is unlocked.
4 Squeeze each release latch on both injector/ejector handles to remove the MSM or I/O module from
the chassis slot as shown in Figure 55.

Figure 55: Release latch is shown contained within the injector/ejector handle

Handle Release Latch


EX_126

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 116


BlackDiamond 8800/12804 Blank Front Panels

CAUTION
To prevent ESD damage, hold the MSM or I/O module by the metal panel edges only. Never touch the
components on the PCB or pins on any of the connectors.

5 Slide and remove the MSM or I/O module from the chassis slot.
6 Place the the MSM or I/O module into the ESD bag to protect it from potential ESD damage. This
will also prevent dust from collecting on the module’s connectors.
7 If a replacement module will not be placed into the chassis slot, you must correctly install a blank
front panel to ensure that the BlackDiamond 8806 or BlackDiamond 8810 chassis maintains proper
cooling. For more information on blank front panels, refer to the following chapter: “BlackDiamond
8800 Series and BlackDiamond 12804 Blank Front Panels” on page 149.
8 Leave the ESD-preventive wrist strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always
available when you need to touch ESD-sensitive components.

BlackDiamond 8800/12804 Blank Front Panels

CAUTION
All unoccupied slots in a BlackDiamond 8800/12804 switch must have BlackDiamond 8800/12804 blank front
panels correctly installed to ensure conformance to FCC requirements as well as guarantee adequate airflow through
the switch.

For complete details on blank front panels, such as installation and removal procedures, refer to the
following chapter: “BlackDiamond 8800 Series and BlackDiamond 12804 Blank Front Panels” on
page 149.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 117


BlackDiamond 8800 MSM and I/O Modules

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 118


10 BlackDiamond 8810 Fan Tray

This chapter describes:


● Overview on page 119
● Pre-Installation Requirements on page 119
● Removing the BlackDiamond 8810 Fan Tray on page 119
● Installing the BlackDiamond 8810 Spare Fan Tray on page 120

Overview
This chapter includes important safety information as well as instructions on how to remove and
replace an Extreme Networks BlackDiamond 8810 fan tray.

Pre-Installation Requirements
You need the following tools and equipment to remove a fan tray and install a spare fan tray in a
BlackDiamond 8810 switch:
● ESD-preventive wrist strap
● #2 Phillips screwdriver
● BlackDiamond 8810 spare fan tray
● BlackDiamond 8810 switch

Removing the BlackDiamond 8810 Fan Tray


To ensure proper removal of a fan tray from the BlackDiamond 8810 switch:
1 Attach the provided ESD-preventive wrist strap to your wrist and connect the metal end of the ESD-
preventive wrist strap to the ground receptacle that is located on the top-left corner of the switch.
2 Locate the two captive screws on the top and bottom position of the fan tray.
3 Turn each captive screw counter-clockwise, using a #2 Phillips screwdriver, to loosen the captive
screws as shown in Figure 56.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 119


BlackDiamond 8810 Fan Tray

Figure 56: Removing the fan tray from the fan tray slot on the BlackDiamond 8810 switch

Fan Tray
Captive
Screws (x2)

Fan Tray
Handle

ASP031A

4 Pull the fan tray half-way out from the fan tray slot, using the fan tray handle also shown in
Figure 56. This action disconnects the power from the switch to the fan tray.

WARNING!
Ensure that motion to all fans blades have stopped before continuing to remove the fan tray.

5 Slide the fan tray completely out from the fan tray slot by placing one hand on the fan tray handle
and the other hand guiding the bottom of the fan tray.

CAUTION
Ensure that both hands are used to support the weight of the fan tray.

NOTE
Leave the ESD-preventive wrist strap permanently connected to the switch so that it is always available when you
need to touch ESD-sensitive components.

Installing the BlackDiamond 8810 Spare Fan Tray


To ensure proper installation of the BlackDiamond 8810 spare fan tray into the BlackDiamond 8810
switch:
1 Ensure that the fan tray slot on the switch is empty.
2 Attach the ESD-preventive wrist strap, that is provided, to your wrist and connect the metal end of
the ESD-preventive wrist strap to the ground receptacle that is located on the top-left corner of the
switch.
3 Align the spare fan tray with the fan tray slot on the switch.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 120


Installing the BlackDiamond 8810 Spare Fan Tray

4 Lift the spare fan tray into the fan tray slot on the switch by placing one hand on the fan tray handle
and the other hand guiding the bottom of the spare fan tray.

CAUTION
Ensure that both hands are used to support the weight of the fan tray.

5 Gently slide the spare fan tray into the fan tray slot on the switch using the fan tray handle as shown
in Figure 57.

Figure 57: Installing the fan tray into the tray slot on the BlackDiamond 8810 switch

Fan Tray
Captive
Screws (x2)

Fan Tray
Handle

ASP030A

6 Turn each captive screw clockwise, using a #2 Phillips screwdriver, to tighten the captive screws also
shown in Figure 57.

NOTE
Leave the ESD-preventive wrist strap permanently connected to the switch so that it is always available when you
need to touch ESD-sensitive components.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 121


BlackDiamond 8810 Fan Tray

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 122


11 BlackDiamond 8810 AC Power Cord Retaining
Bracket
This chapter describes:
● Overview on page 123
● Pre-Installation Requirements on page 123
● Installing the BlackDiamond 8810 AC Power Cord Retaining Bracket on page 124
● Removing the BlackDiamond 8810 AC Power Cord Retaining Bracket on page 126

Overview
This chapter describes important safety information and correct procedures for installing and removing
the BlackDiamond 8810 AC power cord retaining bracket onto and off of the surface surrounding the
power outlets of a BlackDiamond 8800 switch.
The AC power cord retaining bracket maintains the power cord in the power socket and prevents it
from disconnecting due to earthquakes, vibration, or other disturbances.

WARNING!
The BlackDiamond 8810 switch does not have a switch for turning the power of the unit on and off. Power to the
switch is disconnected by removing the wall plug from the electrical outlet. Ensure that all plugs and electrical
outlets are easily accessible.

Pre-Installation Requirements
The following tools and equipment are required before installing or removing the AC power cord
retaining bracket:
● ESD-preventive wrist strap
● #2 Phillips screwdriver
● BlackDiamond 8810 AC power cord retaining bracket
● BlackDiamond 8810 switch
● AC power cord(s) applicable to country of use

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 123


BlackDiamond 8810 AC Power Cord Retaining Bracket

Installing the BlackDiamond 8810 AC Power Cord


Retaining Bracket
To ensure proper installation of the BlackDiamond 8810 AC power cord retaining bracket:
1 Ensure that all AC power cords are disconnected from the power source and from the power outlets
on front of the BlackDiamond 8810 switch.
2 Attach the ESD-preventive wrist strap, that is provided, to your wrist and connect the metal end of
the ESD-preventive wrist strap to the ground receptacle located on the top-left corner of the
BlackDiamond 8810 switch front panel.
3 Loosen all captive screws, located in the middle and on each end of the BlackDiamond 8810 AC
power cord retaining bracket, using a #2 Phillips screwdriver as shown in Figure 58.

Figure 58: BlackDiamond 8810 AC power cord retaining bracket

REMOVE TO INSTALL POWER CORDS

ASP011A

4 Remove the BlackDiamond 8810 AC power cord retaining bracket from the front of the
BlackDiamond 8810 switch as shown in Figure 59.

Figure 59: BlackDiamond 8810 AC power cord retaining bracket removed from the BlackDiamond
8810 switch

REMOVE TO INSTALL
POWER CORDS

ASP007

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 124


Installing the BlackDiamond 8810 AC Power Cord Retaining Bracket

5 Locate the power outlets on front of the BlackDiamond 8810 switch as shown in Figure 60.

Figure 60: Power outlets on front of the BlackDiamond 8810 switch

ASP008

6 Slide the end of the AC power cord(s) into the power outlet(s) on front of the BlackDiamond 8810
switch as shown in Figure 61.

Figure 61: AC power cord end sliding into the power outlets on front of the BlackDiamond 8810
switch

ASP009

7 Ensure that the AC power cord(s) are firmly plugged into the power outlet(s) as shown in Figure 62.

Figure 62: AC power cord plugged into the BlackDiamond 8810 switch power outlet

ASP010

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 125


BlackDiamond 8810 AC Power Cord Retaining Bracket

8 Align the BlackDiamond 8810 AC power cord retaining bracket over the AC power cord end(s) as
shown in Figure 63.

Figure 63: AC power cord retaining bracket correctly aligned

REMOVE TO INSTALL POWER CORDS

ASP012A

9 Tighten all captive screws, located in the middle and on each end of the BlackDiamond 8810 AC
power cord retaining bracket, using a #2 Phillips screwdriver.
10 Connect the other end of the AC power cord(s) into the power source. This powers the system on.
11 Leave the ESD-preventive wrist strap permanently connected to the switch so that it is always
available when you need to touch ESD-sensitive components.

Removing the BlackDiamond 8810 AC Power Cord


Retaining Bracket
To ensure proper removal of the BlackDiamond 8810 AC power cord retaining bracket:
1 Attach the ESD-preventive wrist strap, that is provided, to your wrist and connect the metal end of
the ESD-preventive wrist strap to the ground receptacle located on the top-left corner of the switch
front panel.
2 Disconnect all AC power cords from the power source.
3 Loosen all captive screws, located in the middle and on each end of the BlackDiamond AC power
cord retaining bracket, using a #2 Phillips screwdriver.
4 Remove the BlackDiamond AC power cord retaining bracket from the front of the switch.
5 Remove the end of the AC power cord(s) from the power outlet(s) on front of the switch.
6 Leave the ESD-preventive wrist strap permanently connected to the switch so that it is always
available when you need to touch ESD-sensitive components.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 126


4 BlackDiamond 12804 Switch
12 BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis

This chapter describes:


● Safety Information on page 129
● BlackDiamond 12804 Architecture on page 129
● BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis Front View on page 130
● BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis Rear View on page 131
● Additional BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis Information on page 131

Safety Information

WARNING!
Correct lifting procedures for the BlackDiamond 12804 chassis requires 2 or more people.

Service to all BlackDiamond equipment should be performed by trained service personnel only. Please
read all important safety information prior to installation or removal. See Appendix A for additional
information regarding regulatory compliance certifications applicable to the BlackDiamond 12804
chassis.

WARNING!
The BlackDiamond 12804 chassis should be empty to prevent added weight prior to lifting. This will also prevent
damage to the system components due to possible system chassis flex when lifting.

BlackDiamond 12804 Architecture


This section describes and shows the architecture of the BlackDiamond 8806 chassis:
● BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis Front View on page 130
● BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis Rear View on page 131

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 129


BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis

BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis Front View


The BlackDiamond 12804 chassis consists of the following components:

● One 6-slot chassis with backplane


● Four dedicated I/O module slots (labeled 1, 2, 5, and 6)
● Two MSM slots (labeled 3/A and 4/B)
● Up to 6 SSI redundant AC/DC PSUs (accessed from the front of the unit)
● One fan tray (accessed from the front right of the unit)
● One ESD-preventive wrist strap connector

Figure 64 shows the BlackDiamond 12804 chassis installed with two MSMs and three optional I/O
modules.

Figure 64: Front view of the BlackDiamond 12804 chassis

ESD wrist strap Fan tray


connector

I/O module
slots

MSM module slots

I/O module
slots

Power supplies

Power cord
connectors EX_127
EX_157

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 130


BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis Rear View

BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis Rear View


Figure 65 shows the rear view of the BlackDiamond 12804 chassis.

Figure 65: Rear view of the BlackDiamond 12804 chassis

PSU / fan
controllers

Grounding lug

EX_128

The rear of the BlackDiamond 12804 chassis provides:


● The chassis serial number
● The Ethernet MAC address of the switch
● Symbols of safety certification
● Access to the PSU/fan controllers

Additional BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis Information


Refer to the following chapters for further information about your BlackDiamond 12804 chassis:
● “BlackDiamond 8800 Series and BlackDiamond 12804 Blank Front Panels” on page 149
● “Additional BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis Information” on page 153
■ Uncrating and Unpacking the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Chassis on page 154
■ Rack Mounting the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Chassis on page 156
■ BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis Rear View on page 131
● “BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804 Fan Tray” on page 167
● “BlackDiamond 8800 Series and BlackDiamond 12804 PSU/Fan Controller” on page 171
● “BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804 AC Power Cord Retainer Channel Bracket” on
page 175

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 131


BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 132


13 BlackDiamond 12804 MSM and I/O Modules

This chapter describes:


● About BlackDiamond 12804 MSM and I/O Modules on page 133
● BlackDiamond 12804 MSM Modules on page 134
● BlackDiamond 12804 I/O Modules on page 137
● Installing or Removing a BlackDiamond 12804 MSM or I/O Module on page 142
● BlackDiamond 8800/12804 Blank Front Panels on page 146

NOTE
Read the information in this chapter thoroughly before you attempt to install or remove a BlackDiamond 12804
MSM or I/O module.

About BlackDiamond 12804 MSM and I/O Modules


Two sets of modules are available for the BlackDiamond 12804 switch: the 12804 series of modules and
the 12804 R-series of modules. All BlackDiamond 12804 MSM and I/O modules use Extreme Networks’
4th Generation ASICs that enable high availability, advanced security, and deterministic performance
independent of traffic mix. The BlackDiamond 12804 R-series modules further provide Hierarchical QoS
and larger MAC address, IP route, and ACL capacity for network designs that need the advanced QoS
features and scale. Simply stated, the R-series supports rate limiting, which is the ability to control
bandwidth throughout the network. For complete details about rate limiting, please refer to the
ExtremeXOS Concepts Guide.

BlackDiamond 12804 Series of Modules


● MSM-5 Module
● GM-20T I/O Module
● GM-20XT I/O Module
● XM-2X I/O Module

BlackDiamond 12804 R-series of Modules


● MSM-5R Module
● GM-20XTR I/O Module
● XM-2XR I/O Module

CAUTION
Do not attempt to mix and match modules across Extreme Networks product lines. BlackDiamond 12804 modules
are for use in a BlackDiamond 12804 switch only. When a BlackDiamond 12804 switch is in use, ExtremeXOS
software will not recognize a module from a different product line. Attempting to install an incorrect module type
will cause the following error message to display, "Unable to read cardtype for slot X."

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 133


BlackDiamond 12804 MSM and I/O Modules

NOTE
The BlackDiamond R-series modules must be used together to take advantage of the higher feature-set and scale.
The ExtremeXOS software recognizes the MSM module type installed in your BlackDiamond 12804 switch and only
allows for use of compatible I/O modules within the same series. An error message will display if you attempt to mix
and match modules.

The MSM-5 and MSM-5R support different sizes of Ternary Content Addressable Memory (TCAM).
TCAM is used for Longest-Prefix Match routing lookups, learned MAC addresses, and access control
lists (ACLs).

The MSM-5R supports 256,000 entries per 10-gigabit port, allowing for a maximum of 229,000 learned
MAC addresses per 10-gigabit port.

The MSM-5 supports 64,000 entries per 10-gigabit port, allowing for a maximum of 49,000 learned MAC
addresses per 10-gigabit port.

BlackDiamond 12804 MSM Modules


The BlackDiamond 12804 MSM Modules, MSM-5 and MSM-5R, provide the active switching fabric and
CPU control subsystem. One MSM is required for switch operation; however, adding an additional
MSM to the chassis increases system availability through redundancy. Each MSM provides 192 Gbps of
switching throughput through three ASICs. Each module also contains a temperature sensor,
nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM), and a real-time clock.

CAUTION
You must use compatible MSM and I/O modules from the BlackDiamond 12804 or 12804 R-series of modules. Do
not attempt to mix and match MSM modules from the two different series. The ExtremeXOS software recognizes the
MSM module type installed in your BlackDiamond 12804 switch and only allows for use of a second MSM module
of the same type and compatible I/O modules within the same series. An error message will display if you attempt to
mix and match modules.

NOTE
BlackDiamond 12804 MSM modules require ExtremeXOS 11.4.1 or later.

MSM Activity
The BlackDiamond 12804 switch can run with a single MSM installed, providing full bandwidth with
this single MSM. When you install an additional MSM, one of the MSMs operates as the primary, and
the other becomes the secondary or backup.

The primary MSM is responsible for upper-layer protocol processing and system management
functions. The MSMs in the BlackDiamond 12804 are not load sharing. MSM(A) or MSM(B) is handling
packets while the other is idle.

When you save the switch configuration, it is saved to all MSMs.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 134


BlackDiamond 12804 MSM Modules

Selection of the primary MSM occurs automatically. The following scenarios describe the selection
process:
● When a switch boots with two MSMs installed, the MSM in slot 3/A becomes the primary.
If a switch is operating with one MSM and an additional MSM is added to the switch after it has
been powered-up, the added MSM becomes the secondary. MSMs that operate as secondary, or
backup, MSMs can be inserted and removed without disrupting network services.
● If you remove the primary MSM while the switch is operating, the secondary MSM performs a soft
reset and then becomes the primary MSM.
For example, if you have a BlackDiamond 12804 switch with a primary MSM in slot 3/A and a
secondary MSM in slot 4/B, and you remove the primary MSM from slot 3/A, the secondary, or
backup, MSM in slot 4/B becomes the primary.

MSM LEDs
Table 29 describes the LED activity on the MSM-5 and MSM-5R.

Table 29: BlackDiamond 12804 MSM LEDs


LED Color Indicates
SYS Green blinking Normal operation is occurring.
Amber blinking The status LED flashes amber while diagnostic tests are running on the
module. If a diagnostic test fails, the status LED becomes solid amber. The
LED resets if the diagnostics are terminated. The LED returns to flashing
amber if another diagnostic test is started.
Amber Diagnostic failure has occurred.
Off Switch is not receiving power.
MSTR Green Module is operating as primary MSM.
Amber Module is operating as secondary, or backup, MSM.
Green blinking Power-On Self-Test (POST) is running.
Off Normal operation for diagnostics.
ERR Amber A critical software error has been logged since power-up.
Off Normal operation is occurring.
ENV Green Environment (temperature, fan, power supply) is operating properly.
Amber Environmental failure has occurred.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 135


BlackDiamond 12804 MSM and I/O Modules

MSM-5 and MSM-5R Modules


Figure 66 shows the MSM-5 module.

Figure 66: MSM-5 module

Module status
LEDs MGMT port
ERR
Console Compact
ENV port flash

SYS Reset
MSTR EX_150h

Figure 67 shows the MSM-5R module.

Figure 67: MSM-5R module

Module status
LEDs MGMT port
ERR
Console Compact
ENV port flash

SYS Reset
MSTR EX_151h

NOTE
Although the MSM-5 and MSM-5R are similar in appearance, the functionality of each MSM module varies. The
MSM-5R module is part of the R-series and includes the rate limiting feature, which the MSM-5 module does not
support.

NOTE
You must use BlackDiamond 12804 R-series modules to use rate limiting. You must use the MSM-5R module plus
the GM-20XTR I/O module and/or the XM-2XR I/O module.

The MSM-5 and MSM-5R consist of a printed circuit board mounted on a metal panel that acts as the
insertion vehicle in the BlackDiamond 12804 switch. The module carrier also includes ejector/injector
levers and captive retaining screws at each end of the module front panel.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 136


BlackDiamond 12804 I/O Modules

The MSM-5 and the MSM-5R have the following ports:


● Console port—The DB9 serial console port is used to connect a terminal allowing you to perform
local management.

NOTE
In order to increase the air plenum inside the MSM and enhance cooling performance, the board to which the
DB9 connector is mounted was inverted. Therefore, the orientation of the DB9 connector is upside down relative
to traditional orientation.

● Management port—The 10/100 Mbps Ethernet management port allows you to connect an Ethernet
cable directly from your laptop into the management port to view and locally manage the switch
configurations. This port can also be used to connect the system into a parallell management
network for administration.
● Compact flash—You can insert an external compact flash memory card into this port. (See Chapter 3
for more information on Extreme Networks-supported compact flash cards.)

NOTE
In order to increase the air plenum inside the MSM and enhance cooling performance, the board to which the
compact flash is mounted was inverted. Therefore, the orientation of the compact flash socket is upside down
relative to traditional orientation.

● Reset—Use the Reset button to reset the MSM without removing the module from the chassis.

BlackDiamond 12804 I/O Modules


No configuration information is stored on the I/O modules; all configuration information is stored on
the MSM(s).

When a BlackDiamond 12804 switch is powered on, the software generates a default configuration for
any slots that contain I/O modules. The default configuration allows the I/O module ports to
participate in the VLAN named default. The default configuration for the I/O module is not preserved
unless you explicitly save the configuration to NVRAM.

You can configure parameters of the I/O module after it is installed, or preconfigure a slot for a certain
type of module and configuration. The preconfigured information is applied to the module after it is
inserted. If you preconfigure a slot for a specific module type and then insert a different type of module,
the module reverts to its default configuration.

NOTE
See the ExtremeXOS Concepts Guide and the ExtremeXOS Command Reference Guide for more information about
configuring the modules.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 137


BlackDiamond 12804 MSM and I/O Modules

I/O Module LEDs


Table 30 describes the LED activity for the BlackDiamond 12804 I/O modules.

Table 30: BlackDiamond 12804 switch Ethernet I/O module LEDs


LED Color Indicates
Status Green blinking Normal operation
Amber blinking Configuration error, hardware failure, diagnostic failure, or other
severe module error
Off No power
DIAG Off Normal operation
Amber blinking Diagnostics in progress
Amber Diagnostic failure

I/O Port LEDs


Table 31 describes the LED activity on the GM-20XT, GM-20XTR, XM-2X and XM-2XR I/O modules for
each port.

Table 31: Port LEDs for the BlackDiamond 12804 GM-20XT, GM-20XTR, XM-2X and XM-2XR I/O
modules
LED Color Indicates
Port Solid green Link up
Slow green blinking Port disabled
Amber blinking Activity
Off Link down

Table 32 describes the LED activity on the BlackDiamond 12804 GM-20T I/O module for each port.

Table 32: Port LEDs for the BlackDiamond 12804 GM-20T module
LED Color Indicates
Port with power enabled Solid amber Link up
Slow amber blinking Port disabled
Amber blinking Activity
Slow amber blinking Link down
Blinking amber/green Power fault or insufficient power
Port with power disabled Solid green Link up
Slow green blinking Port disabled
Green blinking Activity
Off Link down
Blinking amber/green Power fault or insufficient power

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 138


BlackDiamond 12804 I/O Modules

GM-20T I/O Module


Figure 68 shows the GM-20T I/O module.

Figure 68: GM-20T I/O module

Module status
LEDs

10/100/1000BASE-T EX_152h

The GM-20T I/O module has 20 autosensing 10/100/1000BASE-T ports that use standard RJ-45
connectors.

The default configuration of the GM-20T I/O module is as follows. All ports:
● Are added to the default VLAN as untagged
● Inherit the properties of the default VLAN (for example, protocol type and VLANid)
● Operate in autonegotiation mode

GM-20T LEDs
The GM-20T I/O module has the following LEDs:
● Module status
● Module diagnostics
● Port status
● Power status

GM-20XT and GM-20XTR I/O Modules


Figure 69 shows the GM-20XT I/O module.

Figure 69: GM-20XT I/O module

Mini-GBIC
fiber ports

Module status 10/100/1000BASE-T ports


LEDs EX_153h

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 139


BlackDiamond 12804 MSM and I/O Modules

Figure 70 shows the GM-20XTR I/O module.

Figure 70: GM-20XTR I/O module


Mini-GBIC
fiber ports

Module status 10/100/1000BASE-T ports


LEDs EX_154h

NOTE
Although the GM-20XT and GM-20XTR are similar in appearance, the functionality of each I/O module varies. The
GM-20XTR is part of the R-series and includes the rate limiting feature, which the GM-20XT does not.

NOTE
You must use BlackDiamond 12804 R-series modules to use rate limiting. You must use the MSM-5R module plus
the GM-20XTR I/O module and/or the XM-2XR I/O module.

The GM-20XT and GM-20XTR I/O modules have 20 autosensing 10/100/1000BASE-T ports that use
standard RJ-45 connectors and 20 SFP mini-GBIC ports.

The default configuration of the GM-20XT and GM-20XTRT I/O module is as follows. All ports:
● Are added to the default VLAN as untagged
● Inherit the properties of the default VLAN (for example, protocol type and VLANid)
● Operate in autonegotiation mode

GM-20XT and GM-20XTR LEDs


The GM-20XT and GM-20XTR I/O modules have the following LEDs:
● Module status
● Module diagnostics
● Port status

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 140


BlackDiamond 12804 I/O Modules

XM-2X and XM-2XR I/O Modules


Figure 68 shows the XM-2X I/O module.

Figure 71: XM-2X I/O module

Module status 10 Gbs ports


LEDs EX_155h

Figure 68 shows the XM-2XR I/O module.

Figure 72: XM-2XR I/O module

Module status 10 Gbs ports


LEDs EX_156h

NOTE
Although the XM-2X and XM-2XR are similar in appearance, the functionality of each I/O module varies. The XM-
2XR is part of the R-series and includes the rate limiting feature, which the XM-2X does not.

NOTE
You must use BlackDiamond 12804 R-series modules to use rate limiting. You must use the MSM-5R module plus
the GM-20XTR I/O module and/or the XM-2XR I/O module.

The XM-2X and XM-2XR I/O modules have two unpopulated XENPAK-based 10 Gigabit Ethernet
ports.

The default configuration of the XM-2X and XM-2XR I/O modules is as follows. All ports:
● Are added to the default VLAN as untagged
● Inherit the properties of the default VLAN (for example, protocol type and VLANid)

XM-2X and XM-2XR LEDs


The XM-2X and XM-2XR I/O modules have the following LEDs:
● Module status
● Module diagnostics
● Port status

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 141


BlackDiamond 12804 MSM and I/O Modules

Installing or Removing a BlackDiamond 12804 MSM or


I/O Module

Pre-Installation Requirements
You will need the following tools and equipment to install a BlackDiamond 12804 MSM or I/O module:
● ESD-preventive wrist strap
● #2 Phillips screwdriver
● BlackDiamond 12804 switch
● BlackDiamond 12804 MSM or I/O module

Distinguishing a BlackDiamond 12804 MSM from an I/O Module


One way to distinguish a BlackDiamond 12804 MSM from a BlackDiamond 12804 I/O module is to
examine the color of the release latch located on each injector/ejector handle. Orange injector/ejector
handles indicate that the module is a BlackDiamond 12804 MSM module, and green injector/ejector
handles signify that the module is a BlackDiamond 12804 I/O module (see Figure 73).

Figure 73: Injector/ejector handle colors of the BlackDiamond 12804 MSM and I/O modules

I/O module
handles are
green

MSM
handles are
orange

EX_158

NOTE
Slots 3/A and 4/B on the BlackDiamond 12804 switch will only run an MSM module.

BlackDiamond 12804 slot accommodation breakdown:


● Slots 1, 2, 5, and 6: I/O modules only
● Slots 3/A and 4/B: MSM modules only

Installing a BlackDiamond 12804 MSM or I/O Module


To ensure proper installation of a BlackDiamond 12804 MSM or I/O module:
1 Attach the ESD-preventive wrist strap to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground
receptacle that is located on the top-left corner of the switch.
2 Remove the blank front panel from the switch slot, if applicable.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 142


Installing or Removing a BlackDiamond 12804 MSM or I/O Module

NOTE
See the Extreme Networks Consolidated XOS Hardware Installation Guide for instructions on how to remove blank
front panels.

3 Pull the ESD bag off of the BlackDiamond 12804 MSM or I/O module:
a Place the ESD bag containing the MSM or I/O module on a flat ESD surface, clean from any
debris.
b Break the quality seal, the ESD warning seal, and the Read Installation Note seal.
c Open the ESD bag and firmly grasp the rail of the MSM or I/O module.
d Pull the ESD bag off while holding the rail of the MSM or I/O module.

CAUTION
To prevent ESD damage, hold the MSM or I/O module by the metal rail and front panel only. Never touch the
components on the PCB or pins on any of the connectors.

4 Prior to inserting the MSM or I/O module, ensure that the module injector/ejector handles are open
(see Figure 74).

Figure 74: Injector/Ejector handles are shown in an open position

EX_159

5 Slide the MSM or I/O module into the switch slot using the injector/ejector handles in the open
position.

CAUTION
Do not slide the MSM or I/O module into the open switch slot if the injector/ejector handles are latched.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 143


BlackDiamond 12804 MSM and I/O Modules

6 Latch the injector/ejector handles, using both hands, by simultaneously pushing both handles
toward the center of the MSM or I/O module (see Figure 75).

Figure 75: Injector/ejector handles shown in the latched position

EX_160

CAUTION
Please note that there are two possible styles of ejector/injector handles. If the captive screws on the handles that
shipped with your system have visible signs of yellow on the stem of the captive screw, continue with the
instructions in this guide. However, if your system shipped with captive screws that show visible red lines on the
head of the captive screw, please use the instructions in the installation note that shipped with your system, P/N
124034-00.

7 Lock the MSM or I/O module into place by turning each captive screw of the injector/ejector
handles clockwise and completely down, which will eliminate all visible signs of yellow on the
captive screw. Use a # 2 Phillips screwdriver as shown in Figure 76.

CAUTION
When using a # 2 Phillips screwdriver, use caution to avoid over torquing and stripping of the screw heads.

Figure 76: Screwdriver is shown turning captive screw clockwise to lock the module

8 Store the BlackDiamond 12804 MSM or I/O module packaging for future use.
9 Leave the ESD-preventive wrist strap permanently connected to the switch; this is to ensure that the
strap is always available when you need to handle ESD-sensitive components.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 144


Installing or Removing a BlackDiamond 12804 MSM or I/O Module

Removing a BlackDiamond 12804 MSM or I/O Module

CAUTION
Please note that there are two possible styles of ejector/injector handles. If the captive screws on the handles that
shipped with your system have visible signs of yellow on the stem of the captive screw, continue with the
instructions in this guide. However, if your system shipped with captive screws that show visible red lines on the
head of the captive screw, please use the instructions in the installation note that shipped with your system, P/N
124034-00.

To ensure proper removal of a BlackDiamond 12804 MSM or I/O module:


1 Attach the ESD-preventive wrist strap to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground
receptacle that is located on the top-left corner of the switch.
2 Unlock the MSM or I/O module by turning each captive screw counter-clockwise in both injector/
ejector handles. Use a # 2 Phillips screwdriver (see Figure 77).

Figure 77: Screwdriver is shown turning captive screw counter-clockwise to unlock the module

EX_125a

3 Verify that the stem of each captive screw in both injector/ejector handles is completely yellow. This
position ensures that the MSM or I/O module is unlocked.
4 Squeeze each release latch on both injector/ejector handles to remove the MSM or I/O module from
the switch slot (see Figure 78).

Figure 78: Release latch is shown contained within the injector/ejector handle

Handle Release Latch


EX_126

CAUTION
To prevent ESD damage, hold the MSM or I/O module by the metal panel edges only. Never touch the
components on the PCB or pins on any of the connectors.

5 Slide and remove the MSM or I/O module from the switch slot.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 145


BlackDiamond 12804 MSM and I/O Modules

6 Place the MSM or I/O module into the ESD bag to protect it from potential ESD damage. This will
also prevent dust from collecting on the module’s connectors.
7 If a replacement module will not be placed into the switch slot, you must correctly install a blank
front panel to ensure that the BlackDiamond 12804 switch maintains proper cooling. For more
information on installing blank front panels, see the Extreme Networks Consolidated XOS Hardware
Installation Guide.
8 Leave the ESD-preventive wrist strap permanently connected to the switch; this is to ensure that the
strap is always available when you need to handle ESD-sensitive components.

BlackDiamond 8800/12804 Blank Front Panels

CAUTION
All unoccupied slots in a BlackDiamond 8800/12804 switch must have BlackDiamond 8800/12804 blank front
panels correctly installed to ensure conformance to FCC requirements as well as guarantee adequate airflow through
the switch.

For complete details on blank front panels, such as installation and removal procedures, refer to the
following chapter: “BlackDiamond 8800 Series and BlackDiamond 12804 Blank Front Panels” on
page 149.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 146


5 Common Characteristics of the BlackDiamond 8800 Series
and the BlackDiamond 12804
14 BlackDiamond 8800 Series and BlackDiamond
12804 Blank Front Panels
This chapter describes:
● Overview on page 149
● Pre-Installation Requirements on page 149
● Things to Know on page 150
● Removing a Blank Front Panel on page 150
● Installing a Blank Front Panel on page 152

Overview
This chapter provides BlackDiamond 8800/12804 blank front panel installation and removal procedures
and describes the importance of their usage in the following Extreme Networks BlackDiamond
switches:

● Extreme Networks BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches


● Extreme Networks BlackDiamond 12804 switch

CAUTION
All unoccupied slots in a BlackDiamond switch must have BlackDiamond 8800/12804 blank front panels correctly
installed to ensure satisfactory protection from EMI as well as guarantee adequate airflow through the switch.

Pre-Installation Requirements
The following tools and equipment are required before installing or removing a BlackDiamond 8800/
12804 blank front panel:
● ESD-preventive wrist strap
● #2 Phillips screwdriver
● BlackDiamond 8800/12804 blank front panel(s)
● BlackDiamond 8800 series switch or BlackDiamond 12804 switch

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 149


BlackDiamond 8800 Series and BlackDiamond 12804 Blank Front Panels

Things to Know
You can remove BlackDiamond 8800/12804 blank front panels at any time without causing disruption
of network services. If you must remove an MSM or I/O module from the BlackDiamond switch, follow
the instructions in this guide.

● BlackDiamond 8810: This 10 slot switch ships with eight blank front panels. The slots are numbered
1 through 10. Slots 5/A and 6/B are represented with a number and letter and are known as the
MSM slots. Two slots are generally left open during shipment: slots 4 and 5A.
● BlackDiamond 8806 and 12804: These 6 slot switches ship with four blank front panels. The slots are
numbered 1 through 6. Slots 3/A and 4/B are represented with a number and letter and are known
as the MSM slots. Two slots are generally left open during shipment: slots 2 and 3A.

Use BlackDiamond 8800/12804 blank front panel(s) to fill slots not occupied by MSM or I/O modules
(see Figure 79).

Figure 79: Blank front panels installed in a BlackDiamond 8810 switch

ASP018

Removing a Blank Front Panel


Follow these steps to ensure proper removal of a BlackDiamond 8800/12804 blank front panel:
1 Select a slot for removal of a blank front panel.
2 Attach the ESD-preventive wrist strap to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground
receptacle that is located on the top-left corner of the switch.
3 Loosen both captive screws, located on each end of a blank front panel, using a #2 Phillips
screwdriver (see Figure 80).

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 150


Removing a Blank Front Panel

Figure 80: Captive screw located on a BlackDiamond 8800/12804 blank front panel

ASP019

4 Remove the blank front panel from the intended slot on the BlackDiamond switch (see Figure 81).

Figure 81: Blank front panel being removed from a switch

ASP020

5 Secure the MSM or I/O module into the open slot on the switch (see the Extreme Networks
Consolidated XOS Hardware Installation Guide for detailed information on BlackDiamond MSM
and I/O module installation).
6 Leave the ESD-preventive wrist strap permanently connected to the switch; this is to ensure that the
strap is always available when you need to handle ESD-sensitive components.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 151


BlackDiamond 8800 Series and BlackDiamond 12804 Blank Front Panels

Installing a Blank Front Panel


To ensure proper installation of a BlackDiamond 8800/12804 blank front panel:
1 Select a slot for installing a blank front panel.
2 Attach the ESD-preventive wrist strap to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground
receptacle that is located on the top-left corner of the BlackDiamond switch.
3 If applicable, remove the MSM or I/O module from the intended slot on the switch (see the Extreme
Networks Consolidated XOS Hardware Installation Guide for detailed information on
BlackDiamond MSM and I/O module installation and removal).
4 Align the blank front panel to the intended slot on the switch. Ensure that the EMI gasket is on the
top of the panel and the stenciled part number is right side up.
5 Tighten both captive screws, located on each end of the blank front panel, using a #2 Phillips
screwdriver.
6 Leave the ESD-preventive wrist strap permanently connected to the switch; this is to ensure that the
strap is always available when you need to handle ESD-sensitive components.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 152


15 Additional BlackDiamond 8806 and
BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis Information
This chapter describes:

● Overview on page 153


● Uncrating and Unpacking the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Chassis on page 154
● BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Chassis Packing List on page 154
● Uncrating and Unpacking Process on page 154
● Rack Mounting the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Chassis on page 156
● Pre-Installation Requirements on page 156
● Rack-Mounting Process on page 157
● Recrating and Repacking the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis on page 159
● BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Mid-Mount Kit and Mid-Mount Racking on page 162
● Pre-Installation Requirements on page 162
● Assembling the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Mid-Mount Kit on page 162
● Mid-Mount Racking the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Chassis on page 164

Overview
This chapter describes how to uncrate, unpack, rack mount, and mid-mount rack the following chassis:
● Extreme Networks BlackDiamond 8806 chassis
● Extreme Networks BlackDiamond 12804 chassis

Re-crating and re-packing instructions are also described in the event that the chassis needs to be
returned to Extreme Networks, Inc.

WARNING!
Correct lifting of the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis requires two or more people.

CAUTION
Please follow the safety and installation guidelines for your organization’s rack system, which should follow industry
standards, when rack mounting the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis.

WARNING!
The BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis should be empty before being lifted. This will also prevent damage to the
system components due to possible system chassis flex when lifting.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 153


Additional BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis Information

Uncrating and Unpacking the BlackDiamond 8806/


12804 Chassis

BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Chassis Packing List


Ensure that the following items are included in the crate:

● BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis with four installed blank front panels


● Power cord retaining bracket
● 19-inch helper bracket (installation tray)
● BlackDiamond documentation pack with ESD-preventive wrist strap

Uncrating and Unpacking Process

NOTE
Only remove the nylon straps when you are ready to open the chassis package.

To ensure proper uncrating and unpacking of the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis:


1 Remove the contents from the shipping carton (see Figure 82).

Figure 82: Removing contents from the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis shipping carton

19-inch helper bracket Power cord retaining bracket

BlackDiamond documentation pack


with ESD-preventive wrist strap

EX_110

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 154


Uncrating and Unpacking the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Chassis

2 Release the clip locks (see Figure 83).


a Place your thumb and index finger inside the clip lock touching the prongs.
b Squeeze the prongs inward applying equal pressure on each side.
c Pull the prongs outward until the clip lock is released from the carton.
Repeat steps 2a through 2c to release each of the remaining clip locks.

Figure 83: Clip locks located on the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis shipping carton

Squeeze prongs
to unlock

Clip lock

Open
lock

EX_087
EX_111

3 Slide the shipping carton up over the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis (see Figure 84).

Figure 84: Removing the carton from the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis

Lift box
off
chassis

Open & remove


4 clip locks
to free box

ASP016b
EX_120

4 Unwrap the chassis.


5 Using each person, place one hand in the empty power supply bay and the other hand in the rear
slot on the back panel of the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 155


Additional BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis Information

6 Gently lift the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis off of the foam cushion and onto the floor (see
Figure 85).

Figure 85: Correct method for lifting the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis

EX_112

NOTE
Save all packaging, clip locks, and box for future use in the event that the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis
needs to be returned to Extreme Networks, Inc.

Rack Mounting the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Chassis

Pre-Installation Requirements
The following tools and equipment are required before rack mounting the BlackDiamond 8806/12804
chassis. Items noted with an asterisk (*) are located inside of the crate.
● Screwdriver for rack mounting the chassis to your organization’s rack system
(screwdriver size with vary based on the requirements of your organization’s rack system)
● 12 rack system mount screws (screw size will vary based on your organization’s rack system; screws
are not provided)
● BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis*
● 19-inch helper bracket (installation tray)*

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 156


Rack Mounting the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Chassis

Rack-Mounting Process
To ensure proper rack mounting of the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis:
1 Locate the 19-inch helper bracket that is shipped with the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis.
2 Mount the 19-inch helper bracket into the system rack using four rack system mount screws (see
Figure 86).

Figure 86: Mounting the 19-inch helper bracket onto the system rack

EX_008

EX_086

3 Lift the back of the empty BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis onto the 19-inch helper bracket.
4 Slowly guide the chassis into the system rack until the chassis is securely seated.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 157


Additional BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis Information

5 Mount the chassis onto the system rack using eight rack system mount screws (screws not
provided). Refer to Figure 87 for the screw mounting locations.

Figure 87: Securing the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis to a standard rack system

EX_127,157
EX_171

6 Remove the 19-inch helper bracket from the system rack once the chassis is secured.

NOTE
For information regarding gage size requirements for chassis grounding wires, refer to “Protective Grounding for the
Rack” on page 24 inside of Chapter 1, “Site Preparation.”

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 158


Recrating and Repacking the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis

Recrating and Repacking the BlackDiamond 8806/


12804 chassis
To ensure proper recrating and repacking of the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis:
1 Ensure that the chassis is empty prior to removal from the system rack. Follow correct Extreme
Networks procedures for removing modules from the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis.
2 Mount the 19-inch helper bracket into the system rack using four rack system mount screws
3 Loosen and remove the eight rack system mount screws holding the chassis in place from the system
rack.
4 Using two people, place one hand in the empty power supply bay and the other hand in the rear
slot on the back panel of the chassis.
5 Slowly guide the chassis out from the system rack using the 19-inch helper bracket.
6 Gently lift the chassis off of the 19-inch helper bracket and onto the foam cushion in the shipping
carton (see Figure 88.)
Figure 88: Correct method for lifting the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis onto the foam cushion

EX_129

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 159


Additional BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis Information

7 Slide the top of the BlackDiamond shipping carton down and over the BlackDiamond 8806/12804
chassis (see Figure 89).
Figure 89: Replacing the carton over the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis

Place box
over
chassis

Insert & close


4 clip locks
to secure box

ASP016a
EX_121

8 Insert the clip locks (see Figure 90).


a Place your thumb and index finger inside the clip lock touching the prongs.
b Squeeze the prongs inward applying equal pressure on each side.
c Push the prongs inward until the clip lock is secured onto the carton.
Repeat steps 7a through 7c to insert each of the remaining clip locks.

CAUTION
Proper installation of the clip locks is critical for safe shipment of the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis. Ensure
that the clip locks are secure and accurately installed.

Figure 90: Clip locks located on the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis shipping carton

Close
lock

Clip lock

Press prongs
to lock

EX_087
EX_111a

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 160


Recrating and Repacking the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis

9 Place the contents back into the shipping carton (see Figure 91).

Figure 91: Placing contents back into the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis shipping carton

19-inch helper bracket Power cord retaining bracket

BlackDiamond documentation pack


with ESD-preventive wrist strap

EX_110

10 Close the top flaps on the shipping carton.


11 Seal the top flaps of the shipping carton with packing tape.
12 Secure the shipping carton with nylon straps (see Figure 92).

NOTE
Nylon straps are optional but are recommended by Extreme Networks for extra security during shipment. The
installation of nylon straps requires a crimping tool. If you do not have nylon straps and a crimping tool available to
secure the carton, the chassis can be shipped without the straps; however, it is very critical that the clip locks are
secure prior to shipment.

13 Use the handles to lift the carton.

Figure 92: Sealed BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis shipping carton with nylon straps

EX_113

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 161


Additional BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis Information

BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Mid-Mount Kit and Mid-


Mount Racking

Pre-Installation Requirements
You will need the following tools and equipment to assemble and install the BlackDiamond 8806/12804
mid-mount kit:
● #2 Phillips screwdriver (for assembling the mid-mount kit)
● Screwdriver for mid-mount racking the switch to your organization’s rack system
(screwdriver size with vary based on the requirements of your organization’s rack system)
● Rack system mount screws (size will vary based on your organization’s rack system)
● 19” helper bracket
● BlackDiamond 8806/12804 mid-mount kit
■ Left and right mid-mount brackets
■ Eight M4 x 8mm phillips flat head screws (mid-mount kit mount screws)
● BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis

Assembling the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Mid-Mount Kit


To ensure proper installation of the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 mid-mount kit:
1 Using two or more people, place the empty BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis in an upright position
on a secure flat surface as shown in Figure 93.

Figure 93: BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis shown properly placed on a secure flat surface

EX_112

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 162


BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Mid-Mount Kit and Mid-Mount Racking

2 Attach the right and left mid-mount bracket to each corresponding side of the BlackDiamond chassis
using the eight mid-mount kit mount screws provided as shown in Figure 94.

Figure 94: Right and left mid-mount brackets attached to the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis

Second mid-mount location

Mid-mount
bracket

EX_136

NOTE
Each mid-mount bracket is clearly marked as Right and Left as viewed from the front of the BlackDiamond 8806/
12804 chassis.

NOTE
Each side of the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis has two vertical linear hole sets to allow for mount position
flexibility when attaching the right and left mid-mount brackets to the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 163


Additional BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis Information

Mid-Mount Racking the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Chassis


To ensure proper mid-mount racking of the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis:
1 Locate the 19” helper bracket (installation tray) that is shipped with the BlackDiamond 8806/12804
chassis.
2 Mount the 19” helper bracket onto the system rack using four rack system mount screws as shown
in Figure 95.

Figure 95: Mounting the 19” helper bracket onto the system rack

EX_008

EX_086

3 Lift the back of the empty BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis onto the 19” helper bracket.
4 Slowly guide the switch onto the system rack until the switch is securely seated.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 164


BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Mid-Mount Kit and Mid-Mount Racking

5 Install rack system mount screws through your system rack and into the open slots of the left and
right mid-mount brackets on the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis. Ensure that the screws are
secure. Refer to Figure 96 for the screw mounting locations.

NOTE
Figure 96 shows a standard rack mount. Use the same mounting locations shown in the figure, but insert the screws
through the designated slot locations of the left and right mid-mount brackets for mid-mount racking.

Figure 96: Mid-mount racking the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 chassis to a standard rack system

EX_127,157
EX_171

6 Remove the 19-inch helper bracket from the system rack once the chassis is secured.

NOTE
For information regarding gage size requirements for chassis grounding wires, refer to “Protective Grounding for the
Rack” on page 24 inside of Chapter 1, “Site Preparation.”

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 165


Additional BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis Information

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 166


16 BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804
Fan Tray
This chapter describes:
● Overview on page 167
● Pre-Installation Requirements on page 167
● Removing the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 fan tray on page 167
● Installing the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 fan tray on page 169

Overview
This installation note describes important safety information as well as instructions on how to remove
and replace an Extreme Networks BlackDiamond 8806/12804 fan tray from the following
BlackDiamond switches:
● Extreme Networks BlackDiamond 8806 switch
● Extreme Networks BlackDiamond 12804 switch

Pre-Installation Requirements
You will need the following tools and equipment to remove the existing BlackDiamond 8806/12804 fan
tray from your BlackDiamond 8806/12804 switch and install a new BlackDiamond 8806/12804 spare fan
tray:
● ESD-preventive wrist strap
● #2 Phillips screwdriver
● BlackDiamond 8806/12804 spare fan tray
● BlackDiamond 8806 or BlackDiamond 12804 switch

Removing the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 fan tray

CAUTION
Removing the fan tray for more than a few minutes may result in overheating and possible damage to the system.
Thermal sensors shut down power if the external temperature exceeds 60 °C.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 167


BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804 Fan Tray

To ensure proper removal of the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 fan tray from the BlackDiamond 8806/
12804 switch:
1 Attach the ESD-preventive wrist strap to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground
receptacle that is located on the top-left corner of the switch.
2 Locate the two captive screws on the top and bottom position of the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 fan
tray.
3 Turn each captive screw counter-clockwise, using a #2 Phillips screwdriver, to loosen the captive
screws (see Figure 97).

Figure 97: Removing the fan tray from the fan tray slot on the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 switch

Fan tray
captive
screws (x2)

Fan tray
handle

EX_114

4 Use the fan tray handle to pull the fan tray half-way out of the fan tray slot (see Figure 97). This
action disconnects the power from the switch to the fan tray.

WARNING!
Ensure that all fan blade motion has ceased before continuing to remove the fan tray.

5 Slide the fan tray completely out from the fan tray slot on the switch: place one hand on the fan tray
handle, place the other hand along the bottom edge of the fan tray, and guide the fan tray out of the
switch.

CAUTION
Ensure that both hands are used to support the weight of the fan tray during removal.

6 Leave the ESD-preventive wrist strap permanently connected to the switch; this is to ensure that the
strap is always available when you need to handle ESD-sensitive components.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 168


Installing the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 fan tray

Installing the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 fan tray


To ensure proper installation of the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 fan tray into the BlackDiamond 8806/
12804 switch:
1 Ensure that the fan tray slot on the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 switch is empty.
2 Attach the ESD-preventive wrist strap to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground
receptacle that is located on the top-left corner of the switch.
3 Lift, align, and install the fan tray into the fan tray slot on the switch: place one hand on the fan tray
handle, place the other hand along the bottom edge of the fan tray, lift the fan tray and align the fan
tray with the fan tray slot on the switch, then slide the fan tray into the slot on the switch (see
Figure 98).

CAUTION
Ensure that both hands are used to support the weight of the fan tray during installation.

Figure 98: Installing the fan tray into the fan tray slot on the switch

Fan tray
captive
screws (x2)

Fan tray
handle

EX_115

4 Turn each captive screw clockwise, using a #2 Phillips screwdriver, to tighten the captive screws (see
Figure 98).
5 Leave the ESD-preventive wrist strap permanently connected to the switch; this is to ensure that the
strap is always available when you need to handle ESD-sensitive components.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 169


BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804 Fan Tray

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 170


17 BlackDiamond 8800 Series and
BlackDiamond 12804 PSU/Fan Controller
This chapter describes:
● Overview on page 171
● Pre-Installation Requirements on page 171
● Removing a BlackDiamond 8800/12804 PSU/Fan Controller on page 172
● Installing a BlackDiamond 8800/12804 Spare PSU/Fan Controller on page 174

Overview
This chapter describes important safety information as well as instructions on how to remove and
replace an Extreme Networks BlackDiamond 8800/12804 PSU/fan controller from the following
BlackDiamond switches:
● Extreme Networks BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches
● Extreme Networks BlackDiamond 12804 switch

Each of these BlackDiamond switches contain two PSU/fan controllers that collect and report data from
the Extreme Networks AC power supply units and the BlackDiamond fan tray.

The BlackDiamond 8800/12804 PSU/fan controllers intervene in the event of power inconsistencies and
provide primary/backup redundancy should a BlackDiamond 8800/12804 PSU/fan controller fail.

NOTE
The BlackDiamond 8810 uses the same PSU/fan controller as the BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804,
but the BlackDiamond 8810 uses a different fan tray.

Pre-Installation Requirements
Ensure that you have access to the back of the switch. You will need the following tools and equipment
to remove a BlackDiamond 8800/12804 PSU/fan controller and install a BlackDiamond 8800/12804
spare PSU/fan controller on the switch:
● ESD-preventive wrist strap
● #1 Phillips screwdriver
● #2 Phillips screwdriver
● BlackDiamond 8800/12804 spare PSU/fan controller
● BlackDiamond 8800 series switch or BlackDiamond 12804 switch

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 171


BlackDiamond 8800 Series and BlackDiamond 12804 PSU/Fan Controller

Removing a BlackDiamond 8800/12804 PSU/Fan


Controller

NOTE
Beginning with ExtremeXOS version 11.2.1.3, you can hot swap the PSU/fan controller unit. Refer to the
ExtremeXOS Concepts Guide for complete information on upgrading software.

To ensure proper removal of a BlackDiamond 8800/12804 PSU/fan controller from the PSU control card
access panel on the BlackDiamond 8800/12804 switch:
1 Attach the ESD-preventive wrist strap to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground
receptacle that is located on the front top-left corner of the switch.
2 Locate the eight captive screws on the PSU control card access panel cover located on the back side
of the BlackDiamond 8800/12804 switch as shown in Figure 99.

Figure 99: Eight captive screws on the PSU control card access panel cover

Loosen Captive
Screws (x8)

PSU Control
Card Access Panel

Remove PSU
Control Card
Access Panel
Cover

ASP032B

3 Turn each captive screw counter-clockwise, using a #2 Phillips screwdriver, to loosen all eight captive
screws on the PSU control card access panel cover also shown in Figure 99.
4 Pull the cover off of the PSU control card access panel on the switch.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 172


Removing a BlackDiamond 8800/12804 PSU/Fan Controller

5 Locate the four captive screws on the PSU/fan controller located within the access panel as shown in
Figure 100. The figure illustrates a BlackDiamond 8810, but the same method also applies to the
BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804.

Figure 100: Four captive screws on the BlackDiamond 8800/12804 PSU/fan controller

Loosen Captive
Screws (x4)

Remove
PSU/Fan
Controller

ASP033B

6 Turn each captive screw counter-clockwise, using a #1 Phillips screwdriver, to loosen all four captive
screws on the PSU/fan controller also shown in Figure 100.
7 Pull the PSU/fan controller out from the PSU control card access panel on the switch, by pulling
equally on the upper and lower handles.
8 Leave the ESD-preventive wrist strap permanently connected to the switch; this is to ensure that the
strap is always available when you need to handle ESD-sensitive components.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 173


BlackDiamond 8800 Series and BlackDiamond 12804 PSU/Fan Controller

Installing a BlackDiamond 8800/12804 Spare PSU/Fan


Controller

NOTE
Beginning with ExtremeXOS version 11.2.1.3, you can hot swap the PSU/fan controller unit. Refer to the
ExtremeXOS Concepts Guide for complete information on upgrading software.

To ensure proper installation of a BlackDiamond 8800/12804 spare PSU/fan controller into the PSU
control card access panel on the switch:
1 Ensure that the PSU control card access panel on the switch is empty.
2 Attach the ESD-preventive wrist strap to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground
receptacle that is located on the front top-left corner of the switch.
3 Align the guide pins in the empty PSU control card access panel with the holes on the
BlackDiamond 8800/12804 spare PSU/fan controller.
4 Push the BlackDiamond 8800/12804 spare PSU/fan controller into the empty PSU control card
access panel until the four captive screws on the spare PSU/fan controller are in alignment.
5 Turn each captive screw clockwise, using a #1 Phillips screwdriver, to tighten all four captive screws
on the spare PSU/fan controller.
6 Align the guide pins on the PSU control card access panel cover with the holes on the PSU control
card access panel.
7 Push the PSU control card access panel cover over the PSU control card access panel until the eight
captive screws on the PSU control card access panel cover are in alignment.
8 Turn each captive screw clockwise, using a #2 Phillips screwdriver, to tighten all eight captive screws
on the PSU control card access panel cover.
9 Leave the ESD-preventive wrist strap permanently connected to the switch; this is to ensure that the
strap is always available when you need to handle ESD-sensitive components.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 174


18 BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804
AC Power Cord Retainer Channel Bracket
This chapter describes:
● Overview on page 175
● BlackDiamond 8806/12804 AC Power Cord Retainer Channel Bracket on page 175
■ Pre-Installation Requirements on page 175
■ Installing the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 AC Power Cord Retainer Channel Bracket on page 176
■ Removing the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 AC Power Cord Retainer Channel Bracket on page 178

Overview
This installation note describes important safety information as well as instructions on how to install
and remove the Extreme Networks BlackDiamond 8806/12804 AC power cord reatiner channel bracket.

This bracket is compatible with the following Extreme Networks BlackDiamond switches:

● Extreme Networks BlackDiamond 8806 switch


● Extreme Networks BlackDiamond 12804 switch
The AC power cord retainer channel bracket maintains the AC power cords in the power sockets and
prevent the cords from disconnecting due to earthquakes, vibration, or other disturbances.

WARNING!
The BlackDiamond 8806 and the BlackDiamond 12804 switch do not have a power switch for turning power to the
unit on and off. Power to a BlackDiamond switch is disconnected by removing the wall plug from the electrical
outlet. Ensure that all plugs and electrical outlets are easily accessible.

BlackDiamond 8806/12804 AC Power Cord Retainer


Channel Bracket

Pre-Installation Requirements
The following tools and equipment are required before installing or removing the BlackDiamond 8806/
12804 AC power cord retainer channel bracket:
● ESD-preventive wrist strap
● #2 Phillips screwdriver
● BlackDiamond 8806/12804 AC power cord retainer channel bracket
● BlackDiamond 8806 or BlackDiamond 12804 switch
● AC power cord(s) applicable to country of use

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 175


BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804 AC Power Cord Retainer Channel Bracket

Installing the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 AC Power Cord


Retainer Channel Bracket
To ensure proper installation of the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 AC power cord retainer channel bracket:

1 Attach the ESD-preventive wrist strap to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground
receptacle that is located on the front top-left corner of the switch.

2 Starting at the left, insert the plug of each AC power cord into the power outlets on the switch, and
lift each power cord over the previous plug (see Figure 101). Ensure that the AC power cord(s) are
firmly plugged into the power outlet(s).

Figure 101: Installing and routing the AC power cords

Starting at the left, insert each plug


and lift power cord over previous plug
EX_138

3 Grasp the AC power cord retainer channel bracket in the orientation shown in Figure 102.

Figure 102: BlackDiamond 8806/12804 AC power cord retainer channel bracket

Captive screw

Captive screw EX_141

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 176


BlackDiamond 8806/12804 AC Power Cord Retainer Channel Bracket

4 Install and secure the channel bracket to the switch by using a #2 Phillips screwdriver to tighten both
captive screws (see Figure 103).

Figure 103: Securing the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 AC power cord retainer channel bracket

Install and secure the channel bracket to


the switch by tightening both captive screws

Captive screw

Captive screw
EX_139

5 From the left, lay the first four power cords into the channel of the bracket (see Figure 104).
6 Lay the last two power cords on top of the bottom four cords (see Figure 104).

Figure 104: Routing the power cords in the channel bracket

From the left, lay first four


power cords into channel bracket

Lay last two power cords


onto others

7 Leave the ESD-preventive wrist strap permanently connected to the switch; this is to ensure that the
strap is always available when you need to handle ESD-sensitive components.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 177


BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804 AC Power Cord Retainer Channel Bracket

Removing the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 AC Power Cord


Retainer Channel Bracket
To ensure proper removal of the BlackDiamond 8806/12804 AC power cord retainer channel bracket:
1 Attach the ESD-preventive wrist strap to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground
receptacle that is located on the front top-left corner of the switch.
2 Using a #2 Phillips screwdriver, loosen the two captive screws located on each end of the
BlackDiamond 8806/12804 AC power cord retainer channel bracket.
3 Remove the channel bracket from the switch.
4 Leave the ESD-preventive wrist strap permanently connected to the switch; this is to ensure that the
strap is always available when you need to handle ESD-sensitive components.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 178


6 BlackDiamond 10800 Series of Switches
19 BlackDiamond 10800 System Chassis

This chapter describes:


● BlackDiamond 10800 System Chassis Architecture on page 181
● Installing the Chassis on page 184
● Installing the BlackDiamond 10800 Cable Manager on page 195

NOTE
Read the information in this chapter thoroughly before you attempt to install or remove the BlackDiamond 10800
series switch.

BlackDiamond 10800 System Chassis Architecture


This section describes and shows the architecture of the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch:
● BlackDiamond 10800 System Chassis Front View on page 181
● BlackDiamond 10800 System Chassis Rear View on page 183

BlackDiamond 10800 System Chassis Front View


The BlackDiamond 10800 series switch consists of the following components:
● One 10-slot chassis with backplane
● Eight I/O module slots, labeled 1 through 8
● Two MSM slots, labeled A and B
● Up to six power supplies (accessed from the front of the unit)
● Two fan trays (accessed from the back of the unit)
● One ESD-preventive wrist strap connector

The BlackDiamond 10800 series switch can support up to the following number of ports and types of
port configurations:
● 32 switched Gigabit Ethernet ports
● 480 1000BASE-X ports
● 480 10/100/1000BASE-T ports

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 181


BlackDiamond 10800 System Chassis

Figure 105 shows the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch installed with two MSM-1 modules and eight
optional I/O modules.

Figure 105: Front view of the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch

MSM module
I/O module slots slots I/O module slots
ESD wrist strap
connector

Power supplies
behind grill

EX_001

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 182


BlackDiamond 10800 System Chassis Architecture

BlackDiamond 10800 System Chassis Rear View


Figure 106 shows the rear view of the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch.

Figure 106: Rear view of the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch

Fan trays

Power supply
controllers

EX_007

The rear view of the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch provides:


● Access to the fan units
● The chassis serial number
● The Ethernet MAC address of the switch
● Symbols of safety certification
● Access to power supply controllers

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 183


BlackDiamond 10800 System Chassis

Power Socket
The BlackDiamond 10800 system chassis supports up to six AC power supplies. Each power supply has
its own power socket. When additional power supplies are installed, they provide redundant, load-
shared power to the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch. If one of the power supplies fails, other power
supplies provide all power and ensure uninterrupted network operation.

Installing the Chassis


The BlackDiamond 10800 series switch fits in standard 19-inch (48.26 cm) racks. You can install the
switch either flush against the back of the rack or in a mid-mount position to give you more access
behind the rack.

This section describes:


● Unpacking the Chassis on page 184
● Standard Rack Installation on page 191
● Mid-Mount Rack Installation on page 193
● Grounding the BlackDiamond 10800 Series Switch on page 194

The BlackDiamond 10800 series switch is shipped with a pre-installed fan tray. For your safety, because
of the increased weight of the chassis after components are installed and to prevent damage to the
equipment, Extreme Networks strongly recommends that you install the I/O modules after you mount
the chassis in a rack.

NOTE
Mount the chassis in a rack before installing any switch components.

Unpacking the Chassis


To mount the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch into a standard 19-inch (48.26-cm) rack in either the
standard or mid-mount position, you need the following tools, equipment, and resources:
● Helper bracket (provided)
● A minimum of four appropriate screws to secure the helper bracket (not provided)
● # 1 Phillips screwdriver
● 12 screws suitable for use with a #1 Phillips screwdriver
● A retractable knife
● An adjustable wrench
● A minimum of two people to help install the chassis into the rack

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 184


Installing the Chassis

Before you Begin


Before you begin unpacking the chassis from the carton, locate the shipping status indicators on the side
of the shipping carton.
● Tilt watch indicator
● Shock watch indicator

Figure 107: Shipping status indicators

Tilt watch Shock watch

Cardboard box

Clip locks

Pallet
EX_083

Each indicator has two color-coded states, or modes: a good, white state, and a warning, red state. A
smooth shipping procedure should leave all four indicators in good, white states. Figure 108 shows the
tilt watch and shock watch indicators in both conditions.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 185


BlackDiamond 10800 System Chassis

Figure 108: Tilt watch and shock watch indicators

Tilt watch Shock watch

Tilt watch Shock watch


in white state in white state

Tilt watch Shock watch


in red state in red state

EX_084

CAUTION
If either the tilt watch or shock watch indicator is showing a red, warning condition, do not proceed with unpacking.
Contact your shipping company or Extreme Networks and speak to a representative before continuing.

Removing the Accessories Box and Preparing the Rack


Begin unpacking the chassis from the carton by removing the accessories box from the top of the carton
and installing the helper bracket into the rack.

The accessories box contains:


● 19-inch helper bracket for installing the chassis in a rack
● ESD-preventive wrist strap
● Front bezel for shielding the switch after installation
● Documentation and media

To remove the accessories box from the carton:


1 Using a retractable knife, cut away the plastic that wraps the carton.
2 Cut the tape that seals the top of the carton.
3 Open the top carton flaps and remove the accessories box, as shown in Figure 109.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 186


Installing the Chassis

Figure 109: Accessories box on top of carton

Accessory box

EX_085

4 Locate the helper bracket.


5 Mount the helper bracket in the lowest available position in the rack using four appropriate screws
(not provided), as shown in Figure 110.

Figure 110: Helper bracket for mounting the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch

BDbrackt

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 187


BlackDiamond 10800 System Chassis

Removing the Chassis from the Carton

NOTE
You will need at least 10 feet of overhead clearance to remove the shipping carton from the chassis.

To remove the carton from the chassis:


1 Remove the four v-boards from the corners of the crate, as shown in Figure 111.

Figure 111: Location of v-boards

Accessory box

EX_093

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 188


Installing the Chassis

2 Remove the four detachable plastic clip locks found near the bottom of the shipping carton, as
shown in Figure 112.
Two clip locks are located on each side of the carton.

Figure 112: Location of clip locks

Tilt watch Shock watch

Cardboard box

Clip locks

Pallet
EX_083

a Place your thumb and index finger inside the clip lock (see Figure 113) adjacent to the two
vertical prongs located there.
b Press the prongs inward, applying equal pressure on each side.
c Pull the prongs toward you until the clip lock is released from the carton.
d Repeat steps 2a through 2c to release each of the remaining three clip locks.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 189


BlackDiamond 10800 System Chassis

Figure 113: Removing the clip locks

Squeeze prongs
to unlock

Clip lock
Open
lock

EX_087

3 Slide the carton up over the chassis, as shown in Figure 114.

Figure 114: Removing the shipping carton

Lift box off


chassis

Remove 4 bolts
holding chassis
to pallet

EX_088

4 Remove the four restraining bolts that hold the BlackDiamond 10800 series chassis to the four
shipping brackets on the shipping pallet (see Figure 114).
5 Follow the steps in “Standard Rack Installation” on page 191 or “Mid-Mount Rack Installation” on
page 193 depending on your installation requirements.

NOTE
Save the packaging, including the carton, bolts, and attached washers for future use, in case you need to return
the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 190


Installing the Chassis

Standard Rack Installation


To mount the chassis in the standard rack position:
1 Place the box that contains the chassis upright on a secure flat surface with the front of the box
facing you.
2 Remove the chassis from the box, following the uncrating procedure described in “Unpacking the
Chassis” on page 184.
3 Have a minimum of two people grab both handles on each side of the switch and lift the switch
from the pallet, as shown in Figure 115.

Figure 115: Lifting the switch from the pallet

EX_090

4 Place the back of empty chassis on the helper bracket in the equipment rack.
5 Using the higher, front handles slowly guide the chassis into the rack until it is securely seated.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 191


BlackDiamond 10800 System Chassis

6 While holding the empty chassis, secure the chassis to the rack, as shown in Figure 116.
The chassis requires eight screws to be securely mounted to the equipment rack.

Figure 116: Securing the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch chassis to a standard rack

EX_009

7 After you secure the chassis to the rack, remove the helper bracket.
Store the bracket for future use; for example, if you need to remove the chassis from the rack.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 192


Installing the Chassis

Mid-Mount Rack Installation


To mount the chassis into the rack using the mid-mount kit:
1 Place the box that contains the chassis upright on a secure flat surface with the front of the box
facing you.
2 Remove the chassis from the box, following the uncrating procedure described in “Unpacking the
Chassis” on page 184.
3 Secure a mid-mount kit flange to each side of the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch chassis using
the provided screws.
Ensure you are using the appropriate flange for the left and right side, as shown in Figure 117.

Figure 117: Mid-mount flange for the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch chassis
Midmount flanges

EX_075

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 193


BlackDiamond 10800 System Chassis

4 Have a minimum of two people grab both handles on each side of the switch and lift the switch
from the pallet, as shown in Figure 118.

Figure 118: Lifting the switch from the pallet

EX_090

5 Place the empty chassis on the helper bracket, and slowly guide the chassis halfway into the rack
until the mid-mount flange meets the front of the rack.
6 While holding the empty chassis, secure the chassis to the rack.
The chassis requires eight screws to be securely mounted to the equipment rack.
7 After you secure the chassis, remove the helper bracket.
Store the bracket for future use, for example, if you need to remove the chassis from the rack.

Grounding the BlackDiamond 10800 Series Switch


Gather the following materials to ground the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch:
● Two zinc-plated steel lock washers
● Two zinc-plated steel nuts
● One Panduit-style, standard two-hole barrel, copper compression ground lug
● 14 AWG stranded copper wire cable

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 194


Installing the BlackDiamond 10800 Cable Manager

To ground the chassis:


1 Strip 0.5-inch (1.2-cm) of insulation from the stranded copper wire cable.

NOTE
For information regarding gage size requirements for chassis grounding wires, refer to “Protective Grounding for
the Rack” on page 24 inside of Chapter 1, “Site Preparation.”

2 Insert the cable into the cable lug.


3 Tighten the cable retention screw, using a 1/4-inch or 5/16-inch flathead screwdriver, to 20 inch/
pounds of torque.
4 Attach the ground lug, lock washers, and nuts (in that order) to the grounding studs on the rear of
the chassis. Tighten the nuts to 125 inch/pounds of torque.

Installing the BlackDiamond 10800 Cable Manager


You need the following tools and equipment to install the cable manager:
● #2 Phillips-head screwdriver
● Cable manager kit

The BlackDiamond cable manager ships assembled in three parts: a cover plate, the cable guides, and
the mounting base, as shown in Figure 119.

Figure 119: Cable manager components

Cable manager cover

Cable guides

Three screw attachments


each side

Cable manager base EX_079

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 195


BlackDiamond 10800 System Chassis

You must remove the cover plate and the six screws from the cable guides before you can mount the
cable manager base onto the rack.

To install the cable manager:


1 Press down on the latches at the top of the cover plate to remove the cover plate.
Removing the cover plate exposes the six screws holding the cable guides onto the mounting base,
as shown in Figure 120.

Figure 120: Cable manager cover plate

Latches at top of closed cover

Hinge tabs fit into cable manager base

Top view of open/removed cover


EX_078

2 Remove the six screws that secure the cable guides to the mounting base.
3 Place the cable manager mounting base above the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch chassis in the
rack.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 196


Installing the BlackDiamond 10800 Cable Manager

4 Use six screws (not supplied) to mount the base onto the rack, as shown in Figure 121.

Figure 121: Mounting the cable manager base on to the rack

Center Center
screws screws
in first in first

EX_076

5 Insert the center screw on each side first.


Before you tighten the center screw, you might need to adjust the height of the cable manager base
to ensure proper alignment with the other two screw holes. The distance between the chassis and the
cable manager base will be approximately 1/4-inch (6-mm) to 7/8-inch (20-mm).
6 Insert the remaining screws.
7 Tighten all six screws securely.
Ensure that the screws do not protrude from the cable manager mounting base so that the cable
guides can fit properly over the base.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 197


BlackDiamond 10800 System Chassis

8 Replace the cable guides onto the cable manager mounting base and secure the guides using six
screws, as shown in Figure 122.
Do not overtighten the screws.

Figure 122: Securing the cable guides onto the mounted cable manager base

EX_077

9 Using the cable guides and cable clips (provided), slide the cables through the clips, holders, and
channel to manage the cables installed on the BlackDiamond chassis, as shown in Figure 123.

Figure 123: Mounted cable manager

Interlocking
cable holder
and cable clips

Side view

EX_080

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 198


Installing the BlackDiamond 10800 Cable Manager

10 Insert the cover plate into the hinge tabs of the cable manager base and press firmly until the latches
lock, as shown in Figure 124.

Figure 124: Cable manager cover plate

Latches at top of closed cover

Hinge tabs fit into cable manager base

Top view of open/removed cover


EX_078

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 199


BlackDiamond 10800 System Chassis

Recrating the Chassis


Should you need to return the BlackDiamond 10800 series chassis, you must recrate it using the original
packaging materials.

NOTE
Contact Extreme Networks Customer Support for instructions on returning the chassis.

To recrate the chassis:

1 Mount the helper bracket in the rack using four appropriate screws (not provided) (see Figure 125).

Figure 125: Helper bracket for the BlackDiamond 10800 series chassis

BDbrackt

2 Using at least two people, remove the chassis from the rack and place onto pallet.
3 Remove the helper bracket from the rack and repackage it into the accessories box.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 200


Recrating the Chassis

4 Attach all four restraining bolts to the four shipping brackets, securing the BlackDiamond 10800
series chassis to the shipping pallet (see Figure 126).
5 Slide the carton down over the chassis (see Figure 126).

Figure 126: Securing the BlackDiamond 10800 series chassis to the shipping pallet

Slide carton
down over
chassis

Install 4 bolts
securing chassis
to pallet

EX_088A

6 Engage the four plastic clip locks found near the bottom of the shipping carton (see Figure 127).
Two clip locks are located on opposite sides of the carton.
a Place your thumb and index finger inside the clip lock (see Figure 128) adjacent to the two
vertical prongs located there.
b Press the prongs inward, applying equal pressure on each side.
c Press the prongs into the carton until it clicks into place.
Repeat steps 6a through 6c to engage each of the remaining three clip locks.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 201


BlackDiamond 10800 System Chassis

Figure 127: Location of clip locks

Tilt watch Shock watch

Cardboard box

Clip locks

Pallet
EX_083

Figure 128: Installing the clip locks

Squeeze prongs
to unlock

Clip lock
Close
lock

EX_087A

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 202


Recrating the Chassis

7 Insert the four v-boards in the corners of the crate (see Figure 129).

Figure 129: Inserting the v-boards

Accessory box

EX_093

8 Replace the accessories box into the top of crate


9 Close crate flaps and seal with packing tape.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 203


BlackDiamond 10800 System Chassis

10 Place four plastic corner protectors on top of shipping crate and secure crate to chassis by using two
nylon straps as shown in Figure 130.

Figure 130: Nylon strap location

Corner
protectors

Nylon straps

Pallet
EX_094

CAUTION
Do not overtighten nylon straps. Tighten securely, but not enough to crush the corners of the shipping crate.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 204


20 BlackDiamond 10800 Series MSMs

This chapter describes:


● Overview of MSMs on page 205
● MSM Activity on page 207
● MSM LEDs on page 207
● Installing the MSM on page 208
● Verifying the MSM Installation on page 210
● Removing an MSM on page 211

NOTE
Read the information in this chapter thoroughly before you attempt to install or remove a BlackDiamond 10800
Series Management Switch Module (MSM).

Overview of MSMs
This overview describes the BlackDiamond 10800 series MSMs, including:
● MSM Activity
● MSM LEDs

The MSM holds both the control plane and the switch fabric for the switch. One MSM is required for
switch operation; adding an additional MSM increases reliability and throughput. In addition, each
MSM has two CPUs for protocol processing and network management.

The MSM-1 and MSM-1XL have different size Ternary Content Addressable Memory (TCAM). TCAM is
used for Longest Prefix Match routing lookups, learned MAC addresses, and access control lists (ACLs).
The MSM-1XL supports 256,000 entries in its lookup tables, while the MSM-1 supports 128,000 entries
in its lookup table. One of these entries is used per MAC learned, one per IP route, and two per ACL;
the lookup table space is dynamically allocated.

For example, if 40,000 ACLs are configured on an MSM-1, along with a routing table of 40,000 entries,
then 48,000 entries would remain for MAC learning. 128,000 total entries - 2 x (20,000 ACLs) - 1 x
(40,000 IP routes) = 48,000.

Table 33 shows that packet throughput between I/O modules increases when additional MSMs are
installed.

Table 33: Packet throughput between I/O modules


# of MSMs Throughput
1 160 Gbps
2 320 Gbps

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 205


BlackDiamond 10800 Series MSMs

You install the MSM in one of the designated (lettered) slots in the BlackDiamond 10800 system chassis.

Figure 131 shows the front view of the MSM.

Figure 131: Management Switch Fabric Module (MSM)

Module status LEDs

Module reset button

Management port
Console port

Compact flash

EX_003

The MSM consists of a printed circuit board mounted on a metal panel that acts as the insertion vehicle
in a BlackDiamond 10800 series switch. The module carrier also includes ejector/injector levers and
captive retaining screws at each end of the module front panel.

The MSM has the following ports:


● Console port—Used to connect a terminal and perform local management.
● Management port—Used to connect an Ethernet cable directly from your laptop into the
management port to view and locally manage the switch configurations. This port can also be used
to connect the system into a parallell management network for administration.
● Modem port—Used to connect a modem for remote access to the CLI.
● Compact flash—Use to insert an external compact flash memory card into this port. (See “External
Compact Flash Memory Card” on page 56 for more information on Extreme Networks-supported
compact flash cards.).

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 206


Overview of MSMs

MSM Activity
The BlackDiamond 10800 series switch can run with a single MSM installed. When you install an
additional MSM, one of the MSMs operates as the primary, and the other becomes the backup.

The primary MSM is responsible for upper-layer protocol processing and system management
functions. For example, OSPF computation and SNMP functions are performed by the primary MSM.
Packet handling is distributed among the CPUs of all installed MSMs.

When you save the switch configuration, it is saved to all MSMs. If you download a new ExtremeWare
image, the image is downloaded to all MSMs.

Selection of the primary MSM occurs automatically. The following scenarios describe the selection
process:
● When the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch boots with one or more MSMs already installed and an
MSM is installed in slot A, the MSM in slot A becomes the primary.
● When the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch boots with a single MSM (regardless of the slot
position), it is selected as the primary.
If additional MSMs are added to the switch after it has been powered on, the added MSM becomes
the backup. MSMs that operate as backups can be inserted and removed without disrupting network
services.
● If you remove the primary MSM while the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch is operating, the
backup MSM experiences a soft reset and then becomes the primary MSM.
For example, if you have a BlackDiamond 10800 series switch with a primary MSM in slot A and a
backup MSM module in slot B, and you remove the primary MSM from slot A, the backup in slot B
becomes the primary.

MSM LEDs
Table 34 describes the LED activity on the MSM.

Table 34: MSM LEDs


LED Color Indicates
SYS Green blinking Normal operation is occurring.
Amber blinking Diagnostic test is in progress.
Amber Diagnostic failure has occurred.
Off Switch is not receiving power.
MSTR Green Module is operating as primary.
Amber Module is operating as backup.
ENV Green Environment (temperature, fan, power supply) is operating properly.
Amber Environmental failure has occurred.
ERR Amber A critical software error has been logged since power up.
Off Normal operation is occurring.
Link/Activity Off Link is down.
Green Link is up.
Amber Packet activity is occurring.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 207


BlackDiamond 10800 Series MSMs

NOTE
To reset the critical software error LED (amber ERR LED), use the clear log static command and reboot the
switch. If you continue to have critical software errors, or the ERR LED is amber after the clear log static
command and a switch reboot, contact Extreme Networks Customer Support.

Installing and Removing MSMs


This section describes:
● Installing the MSM on page 208
● Verifying the MSM Installation on page 210
● Removing an MSM on page 211

The BlackDiamond 10800 series switch comes with eight blank front panels already installed. Use a
blank front panel to fill slots not occupied by I/O modules or switch management modules. For
information about how to install a blank front panel, see “Installing a Blank Front Panel” on page 227.

The BlackDiamond 10800 series MSM is hot-swappable. You can insert a BlackDiamond 10800 series
MSM at any time, without causing disruption of network services. Complete the action of inserting a
BlackDiamond 10800 series MSM in a reasonable time frame. Be sure to insert the module completely to
avoid partial connection of backplane connectors.

Installing the MSM


You need the following tools and equipment to install an MSM:
● Electrostatic discharge (ESD)-preventive wrist strap (provided)
● # 1 Phillips screwdriver
● MSM module

To install the MSM:


1 Select a slot for the module:
● Slot A or slot B in the BlackDiamond 10800 system chassis

CAUTION
You install MSMs only in lettered slots. MSMs do not fit in numbered slots. Forceful insertion can damage the
MSM.

2 Attach the ESD-preventive wrist strap to your wrist and connect the metal end of the wrist strap to
the ground receptacle that is located on the top-left corner of the switch front panel.
3 Remove the blank faceplate from the slot to make room for the module, if applicable.

NOTE
Any unoccupied module slot in the chassis should have a blank faceplate installed to ensure satisfactory
protection from EMI and to guarantee adequate airflow through the chassis.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 208


Installing and Removing MSMs

4 Place the ESD bag containing the MSM on a flat surface, clean from any debris.
5 Break any seals on the bag.
6 Open the ESD bag and firmly grasp the rail of the module.
7 Holding the rail of the module, pull the ESD bag off the module.

NOTE
By holding the rail of the module and pulling the ESD module off the module, you will prevent damage to the
module that might be caused by sliding the module on the ESD surface.

8 Check the connectors for dust and packing materials.

CAUTION
To prevent ESD damage, handle the module by the metal panel edges only. Never touch the components on the
PCB or pins on any of the connectors.

9 Ensure that the MSM is vertical as shown in Figure 132, with the:
● Module name at the top
● PCB to the right
● Ejector/injector levers extended

Figure 132: MSM prior to insertion in a BlackDiamond 10800 system chassis

Module status LEDs

Module reset button

Management port
Console port

Compact flash

EX_016

10 Slide the MSM into the appropriate lettered slot of the chassis, until it makes contact with the
backplane.

NOTE
Use the metal panel, not the PCB, to guide the MSM.

As the MSM begins to seat in the chassis, the ejector/injector levers begin to close.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 209


BlackDiamond 10800 Series MSMs

11 Close the ejector/injector levers, using both hands simultaneously to push the handles toward the
center of the module.
12 Secure the module by tightening the two screws with a #1 Phillips screwdriver.

NOTE
Tighten the screws of this module before you insert additional modules. Otherwise, you might unseat modules
that you have not secured.

13 If you install a backup MSM, use the synchronize command to replicate all saved images and
configurations from the primary MSM to the backup MSM.
You are not prompted to synchronize the images and the configurations from the primary to the
backup. If not synchronized, the backup uses its image and the primary configuration. This image/
configuration mismatch will likely cause the switch to operate differently after failover.

CAUTION
Depending on the size and complexity of your network, you should install and configure a backup MSM when
network disruption will be minimal. You may need to reboot your switch after you use the synchronize command.

14 Store the module packaging for future use.

To install additional MSMs, repeat steps 3 through 13.

NOTE
Leave the ESD-preventive wrist strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you
need to handle ESD-sensitive components.

Verifying the MSM Installation


After you install the MSM, verify that it is working correctly by checking the LEDs on the front panel of
the MSM. If it is operating normally, the front panel LED indicators appear as follows:
● SYS LED—Green blinking
● MSTR LED:
■ Green: Operating as primary
■ Amber: Operating as backup
● ENV—Green
● ERR—Off
● Link/Activity:
■ Green: Link is up.
■ Amber: Packet activity is occurring.

For more information about MSM LED activity, see “MSM LEDs” on page 207.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 210


Installing and Removing MSMs

Removing an MSM
The BlackDiamond 10800 series MSM is hot-swappable. You do not need to power off the system to
remove a module.

You need the following tools and equipment to remove an MSM:


● ESD-preventive wrist strap (provided)
● # 1 Phillips screwdriver
● Replacement MSM

To remove an MSM:
1 Attach the ESD-preventive wrist strap to your wrist and if not already connected, connect the metal
end of the ESD-preventive wrist strap to the ground receptacle that is located on the top-left corner
of the switch front panel.
2 To loosen the module, unscrew the screws with a #1 Phillips screwdriver.
3 Simultaneously rotate the ejector/injector levers outward to disengage the module from the
backplane.
4 Grasp the module front panel with one hand, and place your other hand under the metal panel to
support the weight of the module.

CAUTION
To prevent ESD damage, handle the module by the metal panel edges only. Never touch the components on the
PCB or pins on any of the connectors.

5 Slide the module out of the chassis and place it immediately into an antistatic bag to protect it from
ESD damage and to prevent dust from collecting on the module’s connectors.
6 To install a replacement MSM, follow the installation procedure described on page 208.

To remove additional MSMs, repeat steps 1 through 6.

NOTE
Leave the ESD-preventive wrist strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you
need to handle ESD-sensitive components.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 211


BlackDiamond 10800 Series MSMs

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 212


21 BlackDiamond 10800 Series I/O Modules

This chapter describes the installation of network I/O modules and blank front panels into the
BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches. This chapter describes:
● I/O Modules Overview on page 214
● I/O Module LEDs on page 223
● Installing I/O Modules on page 223
● Verifying the I/O Module Installation on page 225
● Removing I/O Modules on page 226
● Installing a Blank Front Panel on page 227

NOTE
Read the information in this chapter thoroughly before you attempt to install or remove any BlackDiamond 10800
series I/O modules.

CAUTION
Never leave a slot without either a module or blank front panel installed. Doing so can cause the chassis to overheat
due to insufficient airflow.

BlackDiamond 10800 series input/output (I/O) modules consist of a printed circuit board (PCB)
mounted on a metal panel that acts as the insertion vehicle in a BlackDiamond 10800 system chassis.
The module carrier also includes ejector/injector levers and captive retaining screws at each end of the
module front panel.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 213


BlackDiamond 10800 Series I/O Modules

I/O Modules Overview

NOTE
On the BlackDiamond 10800 switch, the 10 Gbps module (10G6X module) must have the serial number
804405-00-09 or higher to support untagged frames. To display the serial number of the module, issue the
show slot <slot_number> command. (All the modules on the Black Diamond 8800 series of switches, as well as the
Summit X450 switch, support tagged and untagged frames.)

This section describes the BlackDiamond 10800 series I/O modules, including:
● G60T Module
● G60X Module
● G20X Module
● 10G6X Module
● 10G2X Module
● 10G2H Module

No configuration information is stored on the I/O modules; all configuration information is stored on
the MSM(s).

When the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch is powered on, the software generates a default
configuration for any slots that contain I/O modules. The default configuration allows the I/O module
ports to participate in the VLAN named default. The default configuration for the I/O module is not
preserved unless you explicitly save the configuration to nonvolatile RAM (NVRAM).

You can configure parameters of the I/O module after it is installed or you can preconfigure a slot for a
certain type of module and configuration. The preconfigured information is applied to the module after
it is inserted. If you preconfigure a slot for a specific module type, and then insert a different type of
module, the module reverts to its default configuration.

NOTE
See the ExtremeXOS Concepts Guide and the ExtremeXOS Command Reference Guide for more information about
configuring I/O modules.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 214


I/O Modules Overview

G60T Module
Figure 133 shows the G60T module.

Figure 133: G60T module

Module status LEDs

RJ-45
connector
ports

EX_004

The G60T module has 60 autosensing 10/100/1000BASE-X ports that use standard RJ-45 connectors. If
you have one MSM installed, all ports on the G60T module are switched through that MSM. If you have
two MSMs installed, the top 30 ports on the G60T module are switched through the MSM in slot A, and
the bottom 30 ports are switched through the MSM in slot B during normal operation.

The default configuration of the G60T module is as follows. All ports:


● Are added to the default VLAN as untagged
● Inherit the properties of the default VLAN (for example, protocol type and VLANid)
● Operate in autonegotiation mode

G60T LEDs
The G60T module has the following LEDs:
● Module status
● Port status
● Port speed

For information about the LEDs and their activity on the G60T module, see “I/O Module LEDs” on
page 223.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 215


BlackDiamond 10800 Series I/O Modules

G60X Module
Figure 134 shows the G60X module.

Figure 134: G60X module

Module status LEDs

Mini-GBIC
ports

EX_005

The G60X module has 60 unpopulated mini-GBIC-based Gigabit Ethernet fiber ports. If you have one
MSM installed, all ports on the G60X module are switched through that MSM. If you have two MSMs
installed, the top 30 ports on the G60X module are switched through the MSM in slot A, and the bottom
30 ports are switched through the MSM in slot B during normal operation.

All Gigabit Ethernet ports on these modules use SPF fiber mini-GBIC connectors and support
1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-LX70, and 1000BASE-ZX ports.

The default configuration of the G60X module is as follows. All ports:


● Are added to the default VLAN as untagged
● Inherit the properties of the default VLAN (for example, protocol type and VLANid)

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 216


I/O Modules Overview

Mini-GBIC Ports
The G60X module supports any of the following mini-GBICs:
● SX mini-GBIC, which conforms to the 1000BASE-SX standard
● LX mini-GBIC, which conforms to the 1000BASE-LX standard
● ZX mini-GBIC, which conforms to the IEEE 802.3z standard

NOTE
For more information about the supported mini-GBIC types and specifications, see “Mini-GBIC Interfaces” on
page 44.

G60X LEDs
The G60X module has the following LEDs:
● Module status
● Port status

For information about the LEDs and their activity on the G60X module, see “I/O Module LEDs” on
page 223.

G20X Module
Figure 135 shows the G20X module.

Figure 135: G20X module

Module status LEDs

Mini-GBIC ports

Mini-GBIC ports

ASP036

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 217


BlackDiamond 10800 Series I/O Modules

The G20X module has 20 unpopulated mini-GBIC-based Gigabit Ethernet fiber ports. If you have one
MSM installed, all ports on the G20X module are switched through that MSM. If you have two MSMs
installed, the top 10 ports on the G20X module are switched through the MSM in slot A, and the bottom
10 ports are switched through the MSM in slot B during normal operation.

Using the G20X module allows you to fulfill line rate traffic.

All Gigabit Ethernet ports on these modules use SPF mini-GBIC connectors, either fiber or copper. The
module supports SFP fiber mini-GBICs 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-LX70, and 1000BASE-
ZX connectors. If you use SFP copper mini-GBICs, you must use the 1 Gigabit mini-GBIC; the G20X
module does not support copper 10/100/1000 SFP copper mini-GBICs.

The default configuration of the G20X module is as follows. All ports:


● Are added to the default VLAN as untagged
● Inherit the properties of the default VLAN (for example, protocol type and VLANid)

Mini-GBIC Ports
The G20X module supports any of the following mini-GBICs:
● 1 Gigabit copper mini-GBIC
● SX mini-GBIC, which conforms to the 1000BASE-SX standard
● LX mini-GBIC, which conforms to the 1000BASE-LX standard
● ZX mini-GBIC, which conforms to the IEEE 802.3z standard

NOTE
For more information about the supported mini-GBIC types and specifications, see “Mini-GBIC Interfaces” on
page 44.

G20X LEDs
The G20X module has the following LEDs:
● Module status
● Port status

For information about the LEDs and their activity on the G20X module, see “I/O Module LEDs” on
page 223.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 218


I/O Modules Overview

10G6X Module
Figure 136 shows the 10G6X module.

Figure 136: 10G6X module

Module status LEDs

10 Gbs ports

EX_006

The 10G6X module has six unpopulated XENPAK-based 10 Gigabit Ethernet ports.

If you have one MSM installed, all ports on the 10G6X module are switched through that MSM. If you
have two MSMs installed, the top three ports on the 10G6X module are switched through the MSM in
slot A, and the bottom three ports are switched through the MSM in slot B during normal operation.

The default configuration of the 10G6X module is as follows. All ports:


● Are added to the default VLAN as untagged
● Inherit the properties of the default VLAN (for example, protocol type and VLANid)

XENPAK Ports
The 10G6X module supports any of the following XENPAKs:
● SR XENPAK
● LR XENPAK
● ER XENPAK
● ZR XENPAK
● LX-4 XENPAK

NOTE
For more information about the supported XENPAK types and specifications, see “XENPAK Interfaces” on page 50.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 219


BlackDiamond 10800 Series I/O Modules

10G6X LEDs
The 10G6X module has the following LEDs:
● Module status
● Port status

For information about the LEDs and their activity on the 10G6X module, see “I/O Module LEDs” on
page 223.

10G2X Module
Figure 137 shows the 10G2X module.

Figure 137: 10G2X module

Module status LEDs

10 Gbs ports

ASP035

The 10G2X module has two unpopulated XENPAK-based 10 Gigabit Ethernet ports.

If you have one MSM installed, all ports on the 10G2X module are switched through that MSM. If you
have two MSMs installed, the top port on the 10G2X module is switched through the MSM in slot A,
and the bottom port is switched through the MSM in slot B during normal operation.

The default configuration of the 10G2X module is as follows. All ports:


● Are added to the default VLAN as untagged
● Inherit the properties of the default VLAN (for example, protocol type and VLANid)

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 220


I/O Modules Overview

XENPAK Ports
The 10G2X module supports any of the following XENPAKs:
● SR XENPAK
● LR XENPAK
● ER XENPAK
● ZR XENPAK
● LX-4 XENPAK

NOTE
For more information about the supported XENPAK types and specifications, see “XENPAK Interfaces” on page 50.

10G2X LEDs
The 10G2X module has the following LEDs:
● Module status
● Port status

For information about the LEDs and their activity on the 10G2X module, see “I/O Module LEDs” on
page 223.

10G2H Module
Figure 138 shows the 10G2H module.

Figure 138: 10G2H module

Module status LEDs

10 Gbs ports

RJ-45
connector
ports

Mini-GBIC ports

EX_116

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 221


BlackDiamond 10800 Series I/O Modules

The 10G2H module has the following:

● 2 unpopulated XENPAK-based 10 Gigabit Ethernet ports


● 20 10/100/1000BASE-T RJ-45-connector ports
● 20 unpopulated mini-GBIC-based Gigabit Ethernet fiber ports

The default configuration of the 10G2H module is as follows. All ports:


● Are added to the default VLAN as untagged
● Inherit the properties of the default VLAN (for example, protocol type and VLANid)

XENPAK Ports
The 10G2X module supports any of the following XENPAKs:
● SR XENPAK
● LR XENPAK
● ER XENPAK
● ZR XENPAK
● LX4 XENPAK
● CX4 XENPAK

NOTE
For more information about the supported XENPAK types and specifications, see “XENPAK Interfaces” on page 50.

Mini-GBIC Ports
The G20X module supports any of the following mini-GBICs:
● 1 Gigabit copper mini-GBIC
● SX mini-GBIC, which conforms to the 1000BASE-SX standard
● LX mini-GBIC, which conforms to the 1000BASE-LX standard
● ZX mini-GBIC, which conforms to the IEEE 802.3z standard

NOTE
For more information about the supported mini-GBIC types and specifications, see “Mini-GBIC Interfaces” on
page 44.

10G2H LEDs
The 10G2H module has the following LEDs:
● Module status
● Port status

For information about the LEDs and their activity on the 10G2H module, see “I/O Module LEDs” on
page 223.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 222


I/O Module LEDs

I/O Module LEDs


Table 35 describes the LED activity on the BlackDiamond 10800 series I/O modules.

Table 35: BlackDiamond 10800 series Ethernet I/O module LEDs


LED Color Indicates
Status Green blinking Normal operation
Amber blinking Configuration error, code version error, diagnostic failure, or
other severe module error
Off No power
DIAG Off Normal operation
Amber blinking Diagnostics in progress
Amber Diagnostic failure
Port x Green Link up
Green blinking Link down
Amber blinking Packet activity
Off Link down

Installing I/O Modules


The BlackDiamond 10800 series switch comes with eight blank front panels already installed. Use a
blank front panel to fill slots not occupied by I/O modules or switch management modules. For
information about how to install a blank front panel, see “Installing a Blank Front Panel” on page 227.

You can insert a BlackDiamond 10800 series I/O module at any time, without causing disruption of
network services. Complete the action of inserting a BlackDiamond 10800 series I/O module in a
reasonable time frame. Be sure to insert the module completely to avoid partial connection of backplane
connectors.

CAUTION
Never leave a slot without either a module or blank plate installed. Doing so can cause the chassis to overheat
because of insufficient airflow.

You need the following tools and equipment to install an I/O module:
● ESD-preventive wrist strap (provided)
● # 1 Phillips screwdriver
● I/O module
● Appropriate type of cable for the I/O module you plan to install

To install an I/O module:


1 Select a slot for the module. Slots are numbered 1 through 8 on the BlackDiamond 10800 system
chassis.
2 Attach the ESD-preventive wrist strap to your wrist and connect the metal end of the wrist strap to
the ground receptacle that is located on the top left corner of the switch front panel.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 223


BlackDiamond 10800 Series I/O Modules

3 Remove the blank front panel from the slot to make room for the module, if applicable.

NOTE
Any unoccupied module slot in the chassis should have a blank front panel installed to ensure satisfactory
protection from EMI and to guarantee adequate airflow through the chassis.

4 Place the ESD bag containing the I/O module on a flat surface, clean from any debris.
5 Break any seals on the bag.
6 Open the ESD bag and firmly grasp the rail of the module.
7 Holding the rail of the module, pull the ESD bag off the module.

NOTE
By holding the rail of the module and pulling the ESD bag off from the module, you will prevent damage to the
module that might be caused by sliding the module on the ESD surface.

CAUTION
To prevent ESD damage, handle the module by the metal panel edges only. Never touch the components on the
PCB or pins on any of the connectors.

8 Ensure that the module is vertical with the module name at the top, the PCB to the right, and that
the ejector/injector levers are extended, as shown in Figure 139.

Figure 139: Module injector/ejector levers and captive screws

Injector/
Open ejector lever

Lock
Open

Lock

Lock

Open

Lock
Captive Injector/
Open screws ejector lever EX_017

9 Slide the module into the appropriate slot of the chassis until it makes contact with the backplane.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 224


Verifying the I/O Module Installation

NOTE
Use the metal panel, not the PCB, to guide the I/O module

As the module begins to seat in the chassis, the ejector/injector levers begin to close.
10 Close the ejector/injector levers using both hands simultaneously to push the levers toward the
center of the module, as shown in Figure 139.
11 Secure the module by tightening the two captive screws using a #1 Phillips screwdriver.

NOTE
Tighten the screws of this module before inserting additional modules. Otherwise, you might unseat modules that
you have not secured.

12 Store the module packaging for future use.

To install additional I/O modules, repeat steps 3 through 12.

NOTE
Leave the ESD-preventive wrist strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you
need to handle ESD-sensitive components.

Verifying the I/O Module Installation


After you install an I/O module, verify that it is working correctly. Check the LEDs on the front panel
of the I/O module and use the command line interface (CLI) show slot <slot number> command to
display slot-specific information about the newly installed module.

LED Indicators
When the I/O module and its ports (if applicable) are configured and operating normally, the front-
panel LED indicators should appear as follows:
● STATUS LED—green blinking
● DIAG LED—off
● Port status LED (per port):
■ green
■ amber blinking

For more information about I/O module LED activity, see “I/O Module LEDs” on page 223.

Displaying Slot Status Information


Assuming the I/O module has no problems, the command show slot <slot> (where <slot> is the
number of the slot where you installed the module) displays information about the module including:
general information about the module (name, serial number, part number), the state of the module

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 225


BlackDiamond 10800 Series I/O Modules

(power down, operational, mismatch between the slot configuration and the module in the slot), and
the number of ports on the module.

For more information about slot status information, see the ExtremeXOS Concepts Guide and the
ExtremeXOS Command Reference Guide.

Removing I/O Modules


All BlackDiamond 10800 series I/O modules are hot-swappable. You do not need to power off the
system to remove a module. Complete the action of removing a BlackDiamond 10800 series I/O module
in a reasonable time frame. Be sure to remove the module completely to avoid partial connection of
backplane connectors.

You need the following tools and equipment to remove an I/O module:
● ESD-preventive wrist strap
● # 1 Phillips screwdriver
● Replacement I/O module or blank faceplate if you are not replacing the I/O module

To remove an I/O module:


1 Attach the ESD-preventive wrist strap, that is provided, to your wrist and connect the metal end of
the wrist strap to the ground receptacle that is located on the top-left corner of the switch front
panel.
2 Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver to unscrew the two captive screws shown in Figure 139.
3 Simultaneously rotate the ejector/injector levers outward to disengage the module from the
backplane.
4 Grasp the module front panel with one hand, and place your other hand under the metal panel to
support the weight of the module.

CAUTION
To prevent ESD damage, handle the module by the metal panel edges only. Never touch the components on the
PCB or pins on any of the connectors.

5 Slide the module out of the chassis and place it immediately into an antistatic sack to protect it from
ESD damage and to prevent dust from collecting on the module’s connectors.
6 If you are not going to install a replacement I/O module, cover the slot with a blank faceplate.
Otherwise, follow the I/O module installation procedure on page 223.

To remove additional I/O modules, repeat steps 2 through 6.

NOTE
Leave the ESD-preventive wrist strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you
need to touch ESD-sensitive components.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 226


Installing a Blank Front Panel

Installing a Blank Front Panel


You can install a blank front panel at any time, without causing disruption of network services.
Complete the action of installing a blank front panel in a reasonable time frame to avoid disruption to
adequate airflow.

CAUTION
Never leave a slot without either a module or blank front panel installed. Doing so can cause the chassis to overheat
due to insufficient airflow.

You need the following tools and equipment to install a blank front panel:
● ESD-preventive wrist strap
● #2 Phillips screwdriver
● Blank front panel

To install the blank front panel:


1 Select a slot for installing the blank front panel.
Slots are numbered 1 through 10 in the BlackDiamond 8810 chassis and 1 through 6 in the
BlackDiamond 8806 chassis.
2 Attach the ESD-preventive wrist strap to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground
receptacle that is located on the top-left corner of the BlackDiamond 8800 chassis.
3 If applicable, remove the MSM or I/O module from the intended slot on the chassis (see the
BlackDiamond 8800 MSM and I/O Module Installation Note, part number 120263-00, for more detailed
information on BlackDiamond 8800 MSM and I/O module removal).
4 Align the blank front panel to the intended slot on the chassis.
5 Tighten both captive screws, located on each end of the blank front panel, using a #2 Phillips
screwdriver.
6 Leave the ESD-preventive wrist strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always
available when you need to handle ESD-sensitive components

An example of installed blank front panels is illustrated in Figure 140.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 227


BlackDiamond 10800 Series I/O Modules

Figure 140: Blank front panels in chassis

Blank
front panels

EX_074

7 Secure the blank front panel by tightening the two captive screws using a #2 Phillips screwdriver.

NOTE
Tighten the screws of this blank front panel before inserting additional modules or blank front panels. Otherwise, you
might unseat modules or blank front panels that you have not secured.

NOTE
Leave the ESD-preventive wrist strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you
need to touch ESD-sensitive components.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 228


22 BlackDiamond 10800 Series Switch Fan Tray,
Filter, and Power Supply Controller
This chapter describes:
● BlackDiamond 10800 Series Switch Fan Tray on page 229
● Removing the BlackDiamond 10800 Series Fan Tray on page 230
● Installing the BlackDiamond 10800 Series Fan Tray on page 231
● Replacing the BlackDiamond 10800 Series Filter on page 232
● Power Supply Controller on page 233
● Pre-Installation Requirements on page 234
● Installing the Power Supply Controllers on page 234
● Verifying a Successful Installation on page 235

NOTE
Read the information in this chapter thoroughly before you attempt to install or remove any BlackDiamond 10800
series fan tray.

BlackDiamond 10800 Series Switch Fan Tray


The BlackDiamond 10800 series switch fan tray, which is pre-installed at the factory:
● Contains two individual fans
● Is hot-swappable, which means you can remove and replace the fan tray without powering down
the switch
● Can be removed and installed by customers

CAUTION
Do not cover or obstruct the fan ventilation holes at the rear of the unit. Doing so can result in overheating and
possible damage to the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch. Thermal sensors will shut down the BlackDiamond
10800 series switch if the internal temperature exceeds 60 degrees Celsius.

The software monitors the fan trays in the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch for overheating. All over-
temperature events cause the switch to send alerts to the network management station or to the switch
log. See the ExtremeXOS Concepts Guide for more information about switch monitoring.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 229


BlackDiamond 10800 Series Switch Fan Tray, Filter, and Power Supply Controller

Removing the BlackDiamond 10800 Series Fan Tray


BlackDiamond 10800 series fan trays are hot-swappable. You do not need to turn off power to the
BlackDiamond 10800 series switch to remove a fan tray.

You need the following tools and equipment to remove a fan tray:
● ESD-preventive wrist strap
● # 1 Phillips screwdriver

WARNING!
Service to all equipment should be performed by trained and qualified service personnel only! Before installing or
removing any components of the system, or before carrying out any maintenance procedures, you must read the
safety information provided in Appendix A of this guide.

To remove the fan tray from the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch:
1 Attach the ESD-preventive wrist strap, that is provided, to your wrist and connect the metal end of
the ESD-preventive wrist strap to the ground receptacle that is located on the top-right corner of the
switch front panel.
2 Unscrew the two captive screws that secure the fan tray to the chassis by turning them
counterclockwise (to the left).
3 Use the finger grips to pull the fan tray out of the chassis approximately 1 inch (2.54 cm); this step
disconnects the power and causes the fans to stop rotating.

Figure 141: BlackDiamond 10800 series fan tray

Fan tray

EX_012

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 230


Installing the BlackDiamond 10800 Series Fan Tray

4 Allow the fan blades to stop spinning completely and remove the fan tray from its slot.

WARNING!
Keep your hands away from rotating fan blades.

5 To support the fan tray, place one hand under the fan tray; use the other hand to pull the fan tray
from its slot.

NOTE
Leave the ESD-preventive wrist strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you
need to touch ESD-sensitive components.

Installing the BlackDiamond 10800 Series Fan Tray


The BlackDiamond 10800 series fan trays are hot-swappable. You do not need to turn off power to a
BlackDiamond 10800 series switch to install the fan tray.

You need the following tools and equipment to install a fan tray:
● ESD-preventive wrist strap
● # 1 Phillips screwdriver
● Replacement fan tray

WARNING!
Service to all equipment should be performed by trained and qualified service personnel only! Before installing or
removing any components of the system, or before carrying out any maintenance procedures, you must read the
safety information provided in Appendix A of this guide.

To install the fan tray in the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch:


1 Attach the ESD-preventive wrist strap, that is provided, to your wrist and connect the metal end of
the ESD-preventive wrist strap to the ground receptacle that is located on the top-left corner of the
switch front panel.
2 Check the connectors on the switch fan tray for dust and packing materials.
3 To support the fan tray, place one hand under the fan tray; use the other hand to guide the fan tray
into the slot.
Gently begin to insert the new fan tray into the slot.

NOTE
If the chassis is powered on, the fan blades will begin turning as soon as the tray makes contact with the
backplane.

4 To secure the fan tray, turn the screws clockwise using the screwdriver until they become tight.

NOTE
Leave the ESD-preventive wrist strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you
need to touch ESD-sensitive components.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 231


BlackDiamond 10800 Series Switch Fan Tray, Filter, and Power Supply Controller

Replacing the BlackDiamond 10800 Series Filter


This section describes how to replace the BlackDiamond 10800 series filter.

You need the following tools and equipment to install a fan tray:
● # 2 Phillips screwdriver
● Replacement filter

NOTE
Extreme Networks recommends that you visually inspect the air filter at least once every three months. Replace or
clean as necessary.

To replace the filter in the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch:


1 Remove the bezel from the front of the chassis using a #2 Phillips screwdriver.
2 Slide the filter out from the chassis.
3 Slide a new filter into the chassis.
Use the directional arrows on the top side of the filter to ensure the filter is facing the correct way, as
shown in Figure 142.

Figure 142: BlackDiamond 10800 series filter

Air filter

EX_081

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 232


Power Supply Controller

Power Supply Controller


The BlackDiamond 10800 series switch includes two power supply controllers, located in the back of the
chassis, that collect data from the installed power supplies and report the results to the MSM modules
via an I2C interface.

When the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch is first powered on, the power supply controllers enable
the power supplies by providing 48V power. The power supply controller also detects and reports
incompatible combinations of power supply types and line voltage feeds and disables the power supply
if an unsafe condition arises.

Two power supply controllers installed in the BlackDiamond 10800 series switch provide primary/
backup redundancy in case that one of the controllers fails or is removed. At least one power supply
controller must be installed.

CAUTION
Do not reach into the power supply controller access area when power is on.

Figure 143 shows the front panel of the power supply controller.

Figure 143: Power supply controller front panel

Module status LEDs

PoE power control port


with status LEDs

EX_018

NOTE
The RJ-45 port on the power supply controller should not be used as an Ethernet port.

NOTE
The BlackDiamond 8800 family PSU/fan controller and spare PSU/fan controller are discussed beginning on
page 115.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 233


BlackDiamond 10800 Series Switch Fan Tray, Filter, and Power Supply Controller

The front panel of the power supply controllers provide status LEDs. Table 36 describes the LED
behavior on the power supply controllers.

Table 36: Power supply controller LEDs


LED Color Indicates
STATUS Amber Diagnostics in progress.
Green Normal operation.
MASTER Blinking Green Unit is primary.
Off Unit is backup.
PoE PWR CTRL STATUS Green Link idle.
Amber Link busy.
PoE PWR CTRL ERROR Off No errors detected.
Amber Errors detected.

Pre-Installation Requirements
You need the following tools and equipment before installing or removing the power supply controller:
● ESD-preventive wrist strap
● # 2 Phillips screwdriver
● Power supply controller
● BlackDiamond 10800 series switch

Installing the Power Supply Controllers


To install a power supply controller:
1 Attach the ESD-preventive wrist strap, that is provided, to your wrist and connect the metal end of
the ESD-preventive wrist strap to the ground receptacle that is located on the top-left corner of the
BlackDiamond chassis front panel.
2 If a blank faceplate is covering the power supply controller bay, remove it and save it for future use.
3 Ensure that the power supply controller is right side up.
4 Slide the power supply controller into the slot, aligning the notch on the top of the slot with the
power supply controller.
5 Use the thumbscrews and a #2 Phillips screwdriver to secure the power supply controller into the
slot.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 234


Verifying a Successful Installation

Verifying a Successful Installation


After you supply power to the switch, the switch performs a power-on self test (POST).

During the POST:


● All ports are temporarily disabled.
● The packet LED is off.
● The power LED is on.
● The MGMT LED flashes until the switch successfully passes the POST.

If the switch passes the POST, the MGMT LED blinks at a slow rate (one blink per second). If the switch
fails the POST, the MGMT LED shows a solid yellow light.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 235


BlackDiamond 10800 Series Switch Fan Tray, Filter, and Power Supply Controller

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 236


7 Summit X450 Series of Switches
23 Summit X450 Series of Switches

This chapter describes the features and functionality of the Summit X450 switch.

● Summit X450 Switch Architecture on page 239


● Summit X450-24t and X450-24x Switch LEDs on page 242
● Summit X450-24t and X450-24x Switch Installation on page 243

Summit X450 Switch Architecture


The Summit X450 switch is a compact unit that comes in two models; the Summit X450-24t (copper)
and the Summit X450-24x (fiber).

The Summit X450 switches deliver the following features:


● Summit X450-24t
■ 20 10/100/1000 Base-T ports that deliver high-density copper connectivity for 20 Gbps in 1.75-
inch (1U) form factor
■ Four dual-mode ports that provide 10/100/1000 Base-T or mini-GBIC connectivity for 4 Gbps of
copper or fiber connectivity
■ All 24 ports are auto-sensing
■ Optional redundant 10-Gigabit Ethernet uplink plug-in module
● Summit X450-24x
■ 20 mini-GBIC ports that deliver high-density fiber connectivity for 20 Gbps in 1.75-inch (1U) form
factor

NOTE
For information about mini-GBICS, see to “Mini-GBIC Interfaces” on page 44.

■ Four dual-mode ports that provide 10/100/1000 Base-T or mini-GBIC connectivity for 4 Gbps of
fiber or copper connectivity
■ Optional redundant 10-Gigabit Ethernet uplink plug-in module

NOTE
The Summit X450 switch certification, safety label, and serial number are located on the bottom of the unit.

For information about configuring the switch, see the ExtremeXOS Concepts Guide and the ExtremeXOS
Command Reference Guide.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 239


Summit X450 Series of Switches

Summit X450-24t and X450-24x Front Views


Figure 144 shows the front view of the Summit X450-24t. Figure 145 shows the front view of the Summit
X450-24x.

Figure 144: Summit X450-24t switch front view

Console
Mini-GBIC ports 10/100/1000 Mbps ports port

Band On = Link
Blinking = Activity

STACK NO.

Shared Ports

Shared ports
S450_002B

Figure 145: Summit X450-24x switch front view

Console
10/100/1000 Mbps ports Mini-GBIC ports port

Band On = Link
Blinking = Activity

STACK NO.

Shared Ports

Shared ports
S450_001B

The front panel on the Summit X450-24t consists of:

● LEDs—For a description of the LEDs and their behavior, see “Summit X450-24t and X450-24x Switch
LEDs” on page 242.
● Dual Mode Ports—Four dual-mode ports that provide 10/100/1000 Base-T or mini-GBIC
connectivity for 4 Gbps of copper or fiber connectivity.
● 10/100/1000 BASE-T Ethernet Ports—Twenty 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet ports that deliver high-
density copper connectivity in 1.75-inch (1U) form factor.
● Console Port—Used to connect a terminal and perform local management.

The front panel on the Summit X450-24x consists of:

● LEDs—For a description of the LEDs and their behavior, see “Summit X450-24t and X450-24x Switch
LEDs” on page 242.
● Dual Mode Ports—Four dual-mode ports that provide 10/100/1000 Base-T or mini-GBIC
connectivity for 4 Gbps of fiber or copper connectivity.
● Mini-GBIC Ports—20 mini-GBIC ports that deliver high-density fiber connectivity in 1.75-inch (1U)
form factor.
● Console Port—Used to connect a terminal and perform local management.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 240


Summit X450 Switch Architecture

Summit X450-24t and X450-24x Rear View


Figure 146 shows the rear view for both the Summit X450-24t and Summit X450-24x models.

Figure 146: Summit X450 switch rear view

External power
Management port supply connection

10 Gigabit 10 Gigabit Power socket


uplink option stacking ports
S450_003A

The rear panel consists of:

● A slot for the dual 10-Gigabit Ethernet uplink module (See Chapter 24 for complete information on
this uplink module.)
● The management port
■ Used to connect the system into a parallell management network for administration.
OR
■ Used to connect an Ethernet cable directly from your laptop into the management port to view
and locally manage the switch configurations.
■ There are two LEDs for the management port, located in the bottom corners of the port. The LED
on the bottom right turns solid green when a cable is inserted and the port detects a link. The
LED on the bottom left blinks green when there is transmission activity on the link.
● Two high-performance stacking ports
■ These ports are currently not supported but are reserved for future software features.
● The connector for the optional Extreme External Power Supply System (EPS).
● AC Power Socket
■ Both Summit X450-24t and Summit X450-24x switches automatically adjust to the supply voltage.
The power supply operates from 100 VAC to 240 VAC.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 241


Summit X450 Series of Switches

Summit X450-24t and X450-24x Switch LEDs


Table 37 lists the specific types of LEDs along with their associated colors and behaviors.

Table 37: LED indicates the status of the switch


Color Behavior
MGMT LED
Green Solid Normal operation
Green Blinking POST in progress
Amber Blinking POST failed
Off No external power attached

Fan LED
Green Solid Normal operation
Amber Blinking Failure
Off No power

Internal Power Supply LED


Green Solid Normal operation
Amber Blinking Failure
Off No power

External Power Supply LED


Green Solid Normal operation
Amber Blinking Failure
Off No external power attached

Ethernet Port LED


Green Solid Link OK
Green Blinking Activity

Management Port LED


Green Solid Link OK
Green Blinking Activity

Stacking Port LED


Green Solid Link OK
Green Blinking Activity

SFP 1G Port LED


Green Solid Link OK
Green Blinking Activity

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 242


Summit X450-24t and X450-24x Switch Installation

Table 37: LED indicates the status of the switch


Color Behavior
XENPAK 10G Port LED (Ports 25 & 26)
Green Solid Link OK
Green Blinking Activity
Off Link down

Summit X450-24t and X450-24x Switch Installation

NOTE
Read the information in this chapter thoroughly before you attempt to install or remove a Summit switch.

CAUTION
Use of controls or adjustments of performance or procedures other than those specified herein can result in
hazardous radiation exposure.

Installing the Summit X450-24t or X450-24x Switch


The Summit X450-24t or Summit X450-24x switch can be mounted in a rack or placed free-standing on a
tabletop. To mount the switch into a rack, you will need the following tools, equipment, and resources:
● Mounting brackets (provided)
● Eight screws (provided) to secure the mounting brackets to the switch
● 4 rack system mount screws (screw size will vary based on your organization’s rack system; screws
are not provided)
● Screwdriver for rack mounting the switch to your organization’s rack system
(screwdriver size with vary based on the requirements of your organization’s rack system)

Rack Mounting the Summit X450-24t or X450-24x Switch


To rack mount the Summit X450-24t or Summit X450-24x switch:
1 Place the switch upright on a hard flat surface, with the front facing you.
2 Locate a mounting bracket over the mounting holes on one side of the unit.
3 Insert the screws and fully tighten with a suitable screwdriver, as shown in Figure 147.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 243


Summit X450 Series of Switches

Figure 147: Fitting the mounting bracket

S450_007

4 Repeat steps 2 through 4 for the other side of the switch.


TX 8.3.3.2 5 Insert the switch into the 19-inch rack.
● Take care to load the rack so that it is not top-heavy.
● Do not cover vents that would restrict airflow. Leave a half-rack space between the units for
adequate ventilation.
6 Secure the switch with suitable screws (not provided).
7 Connect the switch to the redundant power supply (if applicable).
8 Connect cables.

Removing the Summit X450-24t or X450-24x Switch from a Rack


To remove the Summit switch from a standard 19-inch (48.26 cm) rack:
1 Remove power from the switch.
Unplug the power cable(s) from the from the wall outlet(s) first and then from the switch.
2 Disconnect the Summit switch from the redundant power supply (if applicable).
3 Loosen and remove the four rack system mount screws holding the switch in place from the system
rack.
4 Gently remove the switch from the rack and place it on a secure, flat surface with the front of the
switch facing you.

Free Standing and Desktop Mounting of Multiple Switches


The Summit X450-24t and Summit X450-24x switches are supplied with four self-adhesive rubber pads.
Apply the pads to the underside of each device by placing the pad in the marked area at each corner of
the switch ensuring that all corners aligned. You can safely place up to four Summit X450 switches on
top of one another.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 244


24 Summit X450 10Gigabit XENPAK Card

This chapter describes:

● Overview on page 245


● Minimum Software Required on page 246
● Installing the Summit XGM-2xn Card on page 246
● Installing XENPAK Modules on page 248
● Removing a XENPAK Module on page 249

NOTE
Read the information in this chapter thoroughly before you attempt to install or remove the Summit XGM-2xn card.

CAUTION
The Summit XGM-2xn card cannot be hot-swapped. Turn off the switch before installing or removing the Summit
XGM-2xn card.

Overview
The Summit XGM-2xn card is an optional, additional card that adds one or two 10 Gigabit uplink
XENPAK modules to a Summit X450 switch running XOS version 11.2 or later.

The Summit XGM-2xn card has two slots that support any of these Extreme XENPAK optical
transceivers:

● SR XENPAK for the 850 nm range


● LR XENPAK for the 1310 nm range
● ER XENPAK for the 1550 nm range
● ZR XENPAK
● LX4/CX4 XENPAK
● LRM-LR XENPAK

NOTE
For more information about these XENPAK modules, please refer to “XENPAK Interfaces” on page 50.

NOTE
Use only Extreme Networks-approved XENPAK modules in all Extreme Networks devices.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 245


Summit X450 10Gigabit XENPAK Card

Supported ZR XENPAK Combinations


Table 38 lists the supported combinations when installing the ZR XENPAK in the Summit X450 switch.
You can either install one ZR XENPAK and leave one slot empty or install one ZR XENPAK and one SR
XENPAK; the Summit X450 switch does not support any other XENPAK combinations when a ZR
XENPAK module is installed. You must put the specified modules in the specified slots, as shown in
Table 38, for the switch to discover the ZR XENPAK correctly.

Table 38: Summit X450 ZR XENPAK combinations


Left Slot Right Slot
ZR XENPAK Empty
ZR XENPAK SR XENPAK

For more information about the XENPAK modules, see “Installing and Removing a XENPAK Module”
on page 54.

Minimum Software Required


The Summit X450 switch requires the final release build of XOS 11.2 (or later) in order to recognize the
Summit XGM-2xn card.

NOTE
Builds prior to the final release will not support the Summit XGM-2xn card.

Installing the Summit XGM-2xn Card


The Summit XGM-2xn cards are not hot-swappable. You must turn off power to the switch before
installing or removing the Summit XGM-2xn card.

You need the following tools and equipment to install a Summit XGM-2xn:
● ESD-preventive wrist strap
● # 1 Phillips screwdriverf
● Summit XGM-2xn card

WARNING!
Service to all equipment should be performed by trained and qualified service personnel only! Before installing or
removing any components of the system, or before carrying out any maintenance procedures, you must read the
safety information provided in Appendix A of this guide.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 246


Installing the Summit XGM-2xn Card

CAUTION
The Summit XGM-2xn option card cannot be hot-swapped. Turn off the switch before installing or removing the
Summit XGM-2xn card. Use only XENPAK modules approved by Extreme Networks.

To install the Summit XGM-2xn card:

CAUTION
Ensure that proper ESD controls are in use before switch maintenance is performed. This includes but is not limited
to wrist straps that are ground to the switch chassis and earth grounds.

1 Disconnect the AC power and any redundant power supply from the Summit switch.
2 Using a number 1 Phillips screwdriver, remove the filler panel from the option slot on the back of
the switch (Figure 148). Save the screws for re-use.

Figure 148: Removing the option slot filler panel

Filler Panel
ES4K041

3 Align the edges of the sheet metal with the card guides, and carefully slide the Summit XGM-2xn
card into the switch housing until the connectors engage and the card is flush with the back panel of
the switch (Figure 149).

Figure 149: Installing the Summit XGM-2xn card

Summit Option
Card
ES4K042

4 Using the screws from the cover plate, secure the Summit XGM-2xn card to the back panel of the
switch.

CAUTION
Be sure that the option slot always has either an installed Summit option card or a faceplate over the opening.
An uncovered opening could divert air from the switch and cause overheating.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 247


Summit X450 10Gigabit XENPAK Card

Installing XENPAK Modules


This section describes installing and removing the XENPAK module, a 10 Gbps optical transceiver. All
XENPAK modules are installed using this procedure. A typical XENPAK module is shown in
Figure 150.

Figure 150: XENPAK module

Card edge
connector

EWUG003C

The XENPAK module is a class 1 laser device that operates at 5 V. The XENPAK optical modules are
certified to comply with DHHS Rule 21 CFR 1040.10 LN#50 7/2001. Use only Extreme-approved devices
on all Extreme switches.

NOTE
Use only Extreme Networks-approved XENPAK modules in all Extreme Networks devices.

WARNING!
The XENPAK module can emit invisible laser radiation, even when unplugged. Avoid direct eye exposure to the
beam.

CAUTION
To prevent ESD damage to the switch, always use an ESD-preventive wrist strap when installing or removing the
module. Handle the module by its sides only. Never touch the card-edge connectors at the insertion end of the
module.

To install a XENPAK module:

CAUTION
Ensure that proper ESD controls are in use before switch maintenance is performed. This includes but is not limited
to wrist straps that are ground to the switch chassis and earth grounds.

1 Remove the XENPAK module from its antistatic container.


2 If the module has a protective pad covering the card-edge connector, remove the pad.
3 Lift the handle on the Summit XGM-2xn to allow the modules to be inserted.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 248


Removing a XENPAK Module

4 Hold the module by its sides and insert it into one of the two slots on the Summit XGM-2xn
(Figure 151).

Figure 151: Installing a XENPAK module

Cover Plate

XENPAK Module
ES4K043A

5 Slide the XENPAK module as far into the slot as possible, until you hear it click, indicating that it is
firmly attached.
6 Secure the XENPAK module to the Summit XGM-2xn card by turning the captive screws clockwise
until they are hand-tight.
7 Store the antistatic container, dust covers, and card-edge connector protective pad in a clean location
in case you need to remove the XENPAK module.
8 Remove the dust covers from the module connectors before you connect cables.
9 If only one XENPAK module is installed, attach a supplied cover plate over the other module slot.

NOTE
To ensure that your module is undamaged upon installation, you can correlate factory test data with your installation
site test data by consulting the average power reference values shown on the XENPAK module test data sheet (Part
No. 121074-00) enclosed with your module.

Removing a XENPAK Module


To remove a XENPAK module:

CAUTION
Ensure that proper ESD controls are in use before switch maintenance is performed. This includes but is not limited
to wrist straps that are ground to the switch chassis and earth grounds.

1 Disconnect the AC power and any redundant power supply from the switch.
2 Disconnect the fiber-optic cable from the XENPAK module and install dust covers over the module
connectors.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 249


Summit X450 10Gigabit XENPAK Card

3 Turn the two captive screws counter-clockwise until they are completely free from the Summit XGM-
2xn card.

WARNING!
Disconnect the fiber-optic cable from the XENPAK module before removing the module from the Summit XGM-
2xncard.

4 Holding both captive screws, pull the XENPAK module out of the card.

WARNING!
XENPAK modules become very hot after prolonged use. Take care when removing a XENPAK from the switch. If
the module is too hot to touch, disengage the module and allow it to cool before removing it completely.

5 Place the XENPAK module immediately into an antistatic container to protect it from ESD damage
and dust.
6 If you are not installing another XENPAK module, cover the opening with a cover plate.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 250


25 Summit X450 External Power System (EPS)

This chapter describes the features and functionality of the Summit X450 switch.

● Overview on page 251


● Installing the External Power System on page 253
● Installing an EPS-160 Power Supply into the EPS-T on page 254
● Removing an EPS-160 from the EPS-T on page 256

NOTE
Read the information in this chapter thoroughly before you attempt to install or remove an External Power System in
a Summit X450 switch.

CAUTION
Ensure that proper ESD controls are in use before switch maintenance is performed. This includes but is not limited
to wrist straps that are ground to the switch chassis and earth grounds.

Overview
The Extreme External Power System (EPS) allows you to add a redundant power supply to the Summit
X450 switch to protect against a power supply failure. The EPS consists of a tray (EPS-T) that holds one
or two EPS-160 power supplies. Each EPS-160 power supply provides one-to-one redundancy to an
attached Summit X450 switch.

The EPS-160 power supply installs into an existing EPS-T rack-mountable chassis. The EPS can be
ordered with one or two EPS-160 power supplies already installed. You can order an additional power
supply later from your Extreme Networks reseller.

Table 39 lists the specifications for each EPS-160 power supply installed in the EPS-T. Power supply
specifications along with compliance information is also available from the Extreme website.

Table 39: EPS-160 AC power supply specifications


Description Values
Input Voltage 100 VAC to 240 VAC, 50 Hz to 60 Hz
Current Rating 4A at 100 VAC, 2A at 240 VAC
Maximum Inrush Current 30A at 100 VAC, 50A at 50 VAC
Output Voltage +12V DC, maximum output current 13A
+5V DC, maximum output current 1.5A

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 251


Summit X450 External Power System (EPS)

Each individual EPS-160 power supply ships with an AC cord for use in the USA and a special
redundant power supply cable.

NOTE
The redundant power supply cable length is 1 meter.

Table 40 shows the wire-to-pin connections for the connector on the rear panel of the EPS-160 power
supply.

Table 40: Connection specifications for the redundant power supply connector
Pin Number Wire Label
1 NC
2 GND
3 GND
4 GND
5 GND
6 +12 V
7 +12 V
8 RS+
9 GND
10 INT PG
11 EXT_CON
12 EXT_PG
13 +5 V
14 +12 V

Figure 152 shows a close-up view of the redundant power supply cable key.

Figure 152: Redundant power cable key

ES4K027

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 252


Installing the External Power System

Figure 153 shows the pin number assignments for the power supply cable key.

Figure 153: Redundant power connector

1 7

8 14
ES4K028

Installing the External Power System

CAUTION
Ensure that proper ESD controls are in use before switch maintenance is performed. This includes but is not limited
to wrist straps that are ground to the switch chassis and earth grounds.

You need the following tools and equipment to install an EPS:


● Electrostatic discharge (ESD)-preventive wrist strap
● # 1 Phillips screwdriver
● An EPS-T
The EPS-T can be mounted in a rack or placed free-standing on a tabletop.

WARNING!
The EPS must only be installed or removed by trained service personnel in accordance with the installation
instructions. Before installing or removing any components of the system, or before carrying out any maintenance
procedures, you must read the safety information provided in Appendix A of this guide. Not following these
precautions can result in equipment damage or shock.

Rack Mounting the EPS-T


You need the following tools and equipment to rack mount the EPS-T:
● # 1 Phillips screwdriver
● Rack mount kit

CAUTION
Do not use the rack mount kits to suspend the EPS-T from under a table or desk, or to attach the EPS-T to a wall.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 253


Summit X450 External Power System (EPS)

To rack mount the EPS-T:


1 Place the EPS-T upright on a hard flat surface, with the front facing you.
2 Remove the mounting bracket kit (including screws) from the packaging.
3 Locate a mounting bracket over the mounting holes on one side of the unit.
4 Insert the screws and fully tighten with a screwdriver, as shown in Figure 154.

Figure 154: Fitting the mounting bracket

ES4K026

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the other side of the EPS-T.


6 Mount the EPS-T into a 19-inch rack.

Installing an EPS-160 Power Supply into the EPS-T

CAUTION
Ensure that proper ESD controls are in use before switch maintenance is performed. This includes but is not limited
to wrist straps that are ground to the switch chassis and earth grounds.

To install an EPS-160 power supply into the EPS-T:


1 Remove the EPS-160 power supply from the packing material.
2 Remove the cover plate from the empty slot on the EPS-T.
3 Insert the EPS-160 power supply into the front of the EPS-T.
4 Tighten the provided thumbscrews to secure the power supply to the tray.
5 Connect the EPS-160 power supply to the Summit switch by following the procedure in “Connecting
the EPS-160 Power Supply” on page 255.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 254


Installing an EPS-160 Power Supply into the EPS-T

Connecting the EPS-160 Power Supply

CAUTION
Ensure that proper ESD controls are in use before switch maintenance is performed. This includes but is not limited
to wrist straps that are ground to the switch chassis and earth grounds. Do not attach the AC power cord to the
EPS-160 power supply until the EPS-160 is properly grounded and until after the redundant power supply cable is
connected.

You need the following tools and equipment to install an EPS-160 power supply:
● Electrostatic discharge (ESD)-preventive wrist strap
● # 1 Phillips screwdriver

CAUTION
The EPS-160 power supply and the rack must all be connected to protective earth ground before attaching to
another switch.

To connect the EPS-160 power supply to your switch:

1 Connect the keyed-end of the redundant power supply cable to the EPS-160 power supply (see
Figure 155).
The key is a plastic tab on the cable connector housing that fits into the chassis to ensure correct
alignment of the connector.
2 Connect the other end of each EPS-160 power supply cable to the Extreme switch (see Figure 155).
This connector end can only be inserted into the switch with the end marked TOP facing up.

Figure 155: Redundant power connections

Slot for plug

To AC

Keyed end of
redundant power cable
Redundant
power cable
S450_008

3 Using the supplied cable, connect the AC cable to the AC supply for each unit.

NOTE
For countries other than the USA, you might require a different AC cable that is not supplied. Contact your sales
representative for the appropriate cable type and for information regarding the voltage and current requirements
of the power supply.

The PSU-E LED on the front of the EPS-160 should be solid green to indicate that it is ready.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 255


Summit X450 External Power System (EPS)

Removing an EPS-160 from the EPS-T


To remove an EPS-160 power supply from an EPS-T:

CAUTION
Ensure that proper ESD controls are in use before switch maintenance is performed. This includes but is not limited
to wrist straps that are ground to the switch chassis and earth grounds.

1 Disconnect the AC by removing the plug from the wall


2 Disconnect the AC power cord from the EPS-160 power supply.
3 Remove the redundant power cable from the EPS-160 supply.
4 Loosen the thumbscrews on the front of the tray and slide the EPS-160 power supply out of the
EPS-T.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 256


8 Appendixes
A Safety Information

WARNING!
Read the following safety information thoroughly before installing Extreme Networks products. Failure to follow this
safety information can lead to personal injury or damage to the equipment.

Installation, maintenance, and removal of a switch, chassis, or any of its components must be performed
by trained and qualified service personnel only! Trained and qualified service personnel are persons
having appropriate technical training and experience necessary to be aware of the hazards to which
they are exposed in performing a task and of measures to minimize the danger to themselves and/or
other persons.

Considerations Before Installing

WARNING!
Consider the following items before installing equipment.

Ensure that the following conditions are met:

● The system is designed to operate in a typical Telco environmental controlled environment. Choose a
site that has the following characteristics:
● Temperature and humidity controlled indoor area where maximum ambient room temperature
shall not exceed 40ºC (104ºF)
● Clean and free from airborne materials that can conduct electricity.
● Well-ventilated and away from sources of heat including direct sunlight.
● Away from sources of vibration or physical shock.
● Isolated from strong electromagnetic fields produced by electrical devices.
● Secured, enclosed, and restricted access, ensuring that only trained and qualified service
personnel have access to the equipment.
● In regions that are susceptible to electrical storms, we recommend that you plug your system into
a surge suppressor.
● Install equipment into the lower half of the rack first to avoid making the rack top heavy.
● Ensure at least 3 inches clearance on all sides for effective ventilation. Do not obstruct the air intake
vent on the front, side, or rear ventilation grills. Locate the system away from heat sources.
● Ensure that your equipment is placed in an area that accommodates the power consumption and
component heat dissipation specifications.
● Ensure that your power supplies meet the site power or AC power requirements of the all network
equipment.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 259


Safety Information

Installing Power Supply Units

WARNING!
Ensure that the following requirements are satisfied when installing all Extreme Networks power supplies. See
Installation instructions of power supply unit (PSU) in question for ratings and power requirements.

Make sure to satisfy the following requirements:

● Plug power supplies only into properly grounded electrical outlets to help prevent electrical shock
and comply with international safety standards.
● Use only power cords that are certified for use within the country of use. Do not attempt to modify
AC power cords.
● The wall outlet must be installed near the equipment and be easily accessible for quick disconnect.
● Make sure the voltage and frequency of your power outlet match the equipment’s system’s electrical
ratings. The building and/or power source must provide overload protection.
● Use a surge suppressor, line conditioner, or uninterruptible power supply to protect the system from
momentary increases or decreases in electrical power.
● For hot-swappable power supplies, do not slam PSU into the bay.
● If multiple power supplies are used in a switch, connect each power supply to different, independent
power sources. If a single power source fails, it will affect only that power supply to which it is
connected. If all the power supplies on a single switch are connected to the same power source, the
entire switch is vulnerable to a power failure.

For power specifications for Extreme Networks power supplies please see Appendix B of this document
or data sheet of PSU at http://www.extremenetworks.com.

Maintenance Safety
Take the following precautions:

● Use only original accessories and/or components approved for use with this system. Failure to
observe these instructions may damage the equipment or even violate required safety and EMC
regulations.
● The chassis cover should only be removed by Extreme Networks personnel. There are no customer
serviceable components in this system. Repairs to the system must be performed by an Extreme
Networks factory service technician.
● The power on button for the system may not turn off all system power. To remove power from the
system, you must unplug the all power cords from wall outlets. The power cord is the disconnect
device to the main power source.
● Disconnect all power before removing the back panel of any Extreme Networks switch, unless
otherwise instructed by a product specific maintenance procedure.
● Disconnect all power cords before working near power supplies, unless otherwise instructed by a
maintenance procedure.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 260


General Safety Precautions

● When handling modules, optic devices, power supplies, or other modular accessories put on the
electrostatic discharge (ESD) preventive wrist strap to reduce the risk of electronic damage to the
equipment. Leave the ESD-preventive wrist strap permanently attached to the chassis so that it is
always available when you need to handle ESD-sensitive components.
● Ensure that all cables are installed in a manner to avoid strain. Use tie wraps or other strain relief
devices.
● Replace power cord immediately if it shows any signs of damage.

General Safety Precautions


Ensure that you conform to the following guidelines:

● Do not attempt to lift objects that you think are too heavy for you.
● When installing in rack, caution should be taken to load heavier devices in lowest portions of rack to
avoid a top heavy hazard.
● For Summit desktop switches, do not place a monitor or other objects on top of the equipment. The
chassis cover is not designed to support weight.
● Only use tools and equipment that are in perfect condition. Do not use equipment with visible
damage.
● Protecting ESD: To protect ESDs always wear a wristband before carrying out any work on PC
boards and modules. Transport PC boards only in electrostatic packaging. Always place PC boards
on a grounded surface before working on them.
● Laying cables: Lay cables so as to prevent any risk of these cables being damaged or causing
accidents, such as tripping.

Figure 156: Meeting Power Requirements

LAN Systems
WARNING!
This equipment is intended for intra-building. Intra-building connections are defined as cable runs that are located
in the same building as the unit.

This equipment can be connected between buildings if one of the following requirements are met:
● Cable runs less then 140ft between buildings
● Cable runs between buildings are directly buried.
● Cable runs between buildings are in an underground conduit, where a continuous metallic cable
shield or a continuous metallic conduit containing the cable is bonded to each building grounding
electrode system.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 261


Safety Information

PoE Devices
When connecting power over Ethernet (PoE) devices to a PoE switch, all connections between the PoE
device and the switch must remain within the same building and use a low-voltage power distribution
system per IEEE 802.3af.

Uninterruptible Power Supply Requirements


An uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is a device that sits between a power supply (such as a wall
outlet) and a device (such as a switch) to prevent outages, sags, surges, and bad harmonics from
adversely affecting the performance of the device.

UPS Features
A UPS traditionally can perform the following functions:
● Absorb relatively small power surges.
● Smooth out noisy power sources.
● Continue to provide power to equipment during line sags.
● Provide power for some time after a blackout has occurred.

In addition, some UPS or UPS plus software combinations provide the following functions:
● Automatically shut down equipment during long power outages.
● Monitor and log power supply status.
● Display the voltage (current draw) of the equipment.
● Restart equipment after a long power outage.
● Display the voltage currently on the line.
● Provide alarms on certain error conditions.
● Provide short circuit protection.

Calculating Amperage Requirements


To determine the size of UPS that you need:
1 Locate the voltage and amperage requirements for each piece of equipment. These numbers are
usually located on a sticker on the back or bottom of your equipment. Then multiply the numbers
together to get the Volt-Amps (VA):
VA = Volts x Amperes
2 Add the VA from each piece of equipment together to find the total VA requirement.
To determine the minimum amperage requirements for your UPS, we recommend that you add 30%
to the total.

UPS Transition Time


Transition time is the time that is necessary for the UPS to transfer from utility power to full-load
battery power. For Extreme Networks products, a transition time of less than 20 milliseconds is required
for optimum performance.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 262


Power Supply Cord Selection

Power Supply Cord Selection


Extreme Networks provides power input cords shipped within the product box for use in the US and
Canada. Power supply cords for use outside of the United States and Canada are typically provided
separately by third-party distribution centers. Contact Extreme’s TAC for questions regarding the
proper selection of a power input cord for your specific switch.

The following are power cord requirements for use on Extreme switches:

Summit 450 Series Switches:

● Wire: 18 AWG (.823mm2) minimum, 3-conductor flexible cable, Type SVT, SJT, HAR or equivalent,
no longer then 15ft
● Wall plug: Suitable for use in country of installation & approved by local regulatory authority
● Device connector: IEC320-C13, rated at 10 A, 250 VAC
● Power cord assembly: Must be rated at 10A, 250V by in-country regulatory authority

Black Diamond SSI AC PSU Model 60020:

● Wire: 16 AWG (1.31 mm2) minimum, 3-conductor flexible cable, Type SVT, SJT, HAR or equivalent,
no longer then 10ft
● Wall plug: Suitable for use in country of installation & approved by local regulatory authority
● Device connector: IEC320-C13, 90 degree angle, rated at 15 A, 250 VAC
● Power cord assembly: Must be rated at 10A, 250V by in-country regulatory authority

Black Diamond SSI DC PSU, Model 60021:

● Wire UL LISTED Type TC (Tray Cable), three conductor, 8 AWG, jacketed, and marked (UL) TC, 90C
min

NOTE
Tray Cable is a UL US only requirement. Outside United States standard 8 AWG (8.35mm2), 90C wire is
acceptable.

● Wall plug: N/A, 3-conductor wires have been stripped and are ready for connection to DC power
source mains
● Device Connector: Molex Shell Connector PN 42816-0312; Molex Pin Connectors PN 42815-0032
● Assembly Rating: 75VDC, 30A, (Do not disconnect under load)

WARNING!
When using multiple power supplies, make sure that each power supply is attached to independent circuits breakers.
See PS installation instructions of PS for proper sizing of circuit breaker.

Ensure that the source outlet is properly grounded per countries local electrical requirements before plugging the AC
supply power cord into a PSU.

For specific product input power requirements refer to data Sheet of product or modular PSU at http://
www.extremenetworks.com or Appendix B of this document.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 263


Safety Information

The following country specific safety instructions:

● Argentina: The supply plug must comply with Argentinean standards


● Australia: Use AS 3112 for 110/220 VAC power supplies
● Denmark: The supply plug must comply with section 107-2-D1, standard DK2-1a or DK2-5a
● International: Use CEE 7/7 for 110/220 VAC power supplies.
● Japan:
● Use JIS 8303 for 110/220 VAC power supplies
● The power cord provided with the power supply, switch, or chassis is for use only with that
specific product from Extreme Networks; it is not for use with any other product from Extreme
Networks or any other vendors' equipment.
● North America: Must be cULus listed or cCSAus Listed.
● Switzerland: The supply plug must comply with SEV/ASE 1011.
● United Kingdom: Use BS 1363 for 110/220 VAC power supplies.

NOTE
This equipment is not intended to be directly powered by power distribution systems where phase-phase voltages
exceed 240V AC (2P+PE) such as those used in Norway, France and other countries. For these applications it is
recommended that a transformer is used to step down the voltage to < 240V AC from phase-phase, or ensure a
connection to a (P+N+PE) power distribution where voltage do not exceed 240V AC.

All installations should confirm that product is reliably grounded per countries local electrical codes.

NOTE
Building codes vary worldwide; therefore, Extreme Networks strongly recommends that you consult an electrical
contractor to ensure proper equipment grounding and power distribution for your specific installation & country.

Battery Replacement and Disposal


Batteries included with Extreme products are encapsulated and must be replaced by qualified Extreme
Service personnel only. Contact your Extreme Service personnel for product replacement. Do not
attempt to replace the battery. If these instructions are disregarded and replacement of these batteries is
attempted, the following guidelines must be followed to avoid danger of explosion:

1 Replace with same or equivalent battery type as recommended by the battery manufacturer.
2 Dispose of battery in accordance with the battery manufacturer’s recommendation.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 264


Fiber Optic Ports—Optical Safety

Fiber Optic Ports—Optical Safety


The following Safety Warnings apply to all optic devices used in Extreme equipment. Including but
not limited to SC GBICs, SFP GBICs and XENPAKs optic modules that are removable or directly attched
to an A/O blade or chassisystem.

WARNING!
When working with laser optic modules these following precautions must be followed or hazardious radiation
exsposure may occur.

● Never look at the transmit LED/laser through a magnifying device while it is powered on.
● Never look directly at a fiber port on the switch or at the ends of fiber cable when they are powered on.
● Invisible laser radiation can occur when the connectors are open. Avoid direct eye exposure to the beam
when optic connections are unplugged.
● Never alter modify or change optic device in any way other then suggested in this manual.

Safety Specifications:

● Class 1 Laser Product


● Compliant with EN60825-1+A2:2001 in accordance with Low Voltage Directive
● Compliant with FCC 21 CFR Chapter 1, Subchapter J in accordance with FDA & CDRH requirments

NOTE
See "Installation of Optic Modules" within "Hardware User Manual" of switch or I/O Blade for further safety
instructions and compliance information when installing an optical device within an Extreme products.

NOTE
Extreme Networks optics are tested to work in all supported Extreme Networks switches. We recommend that all
customers use Extreme Networks optics in their Extreme Networks switches. Extreme Networks assumes no liability
for third-party optics. While Extreme Networks does not block third-party optics, we cannot ensure that all third-party
party optics operate properly in all Extreme Networks switches. The customer assumes all risks associated with using
third-party optics in Extreme Networks switches.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 265


Safety Information

Sicherheitshinweise
WARNHINWEIS!
Vor der Installation der Produkte von Extreme Networks sind die nachfolgenden Sicherheitshinweise aufmerksam zu
lesen. Die Nichtbeachtung dieser Sicherheitshinweise kann zu Verletzungen oder Schäden an der Ausrüstung führen.

Installation, Wartung und Ausbau eines Switch, einer Grundplatte oder einer seiner Komponenten
dürfen nur von geschultem und qualifiziertem Servicepersonal durchgeführt werden! Geschulte und
qualifizierte Servicetechniker verfügen über die erforderliche technische Ausbildung und Erfahrung, um
mögliche Gefahren bei der Durchführung von Servicearbeiten zu erkennen und Maßnahmen zur
Minimierung der Gefahr für sich bzw. andere zu treffen.

Hinweise zur Installation


WARNHINWEIS!
Beachten Sie vor der Installation der Ausrüstung folgende Punkte.

Stellen Sie sicher, dass die nachfolgend aufgeführten Bedingungen erfüllt sind:

● Das System ist für den Einsatz in einer typischen Umgebung gemäß Telco-Vorgaben vorgesehen.
Wählen Sie einen Aufstellort mit den folgenden Eigenschaften:
● Innenbereich mit Temperatur- und Feuchtigkeitsregelung, wobei die maximale Raumtemperatur
40°C nicht überschreiten darf.
● Sauber und frei von elektrisch aufladbaren Teilchen in der Luft.
● Ausreichende Belüftung und Abstand zu Wärmequellen, einschließlich direktem Sonnenlicht
● Ausreichender Abstand zu Quellen, die Erschütterungen oder Schläge/Stöße hervorrufen können
● Isolierung von starken elektromagnetischen Feldern, wie sie durch Elektrogeräte erzeugt werden
● Sicherer, abgeschlossener Arbeitsbereich mit beschränktem Zugang, sodass nur geschultes und
qualifiziertes Servicepersonal Zugriff auf das Gerät hat
● In für elektrische Stürme anfälligen Gebieten wird empfohlen, das System an einen
Spannungsstoßunterdrücker anzuschließen.
● Die Ausrüstung im unteren Teil des Gestells installieren, um zu vermeiden, dass der obere Teil
des Gestells zu schwer wird.
● Auf allen Seiten für mindestens 7,5 cm Abstand sorgen, um eine ausreichende Belüftung zu
gewährleisten. Die Lufteinlassöffnung an den vorderen, seitlichen und hinteren Entlüftungsgittern
nicht blockieren. Das System nicht in der Nähe von Wärmequellen aufstellen.
● Sicherstellen, dass die Ausrüstung in einem Bereich aufgestellt wird, der den Spezifikationen für
Leistungsaufnahme und Wärmeabstrahlung der Komponenten entspricht.
● Sicherstellen, dass Ihre Netzteile die Anforderungen an die Strom- oder Wechselstromversorgung
vor Ort für alle Netzwerkgeräte erfüllen.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 266


Fiber Optic Ports—Optical Safety

Installation von Netzteilen


WARNHINWEIS!
Bei der Installation sämtlicher Netzteile von Extreme Networks muss sichergestellt werden, dass die nachfolgend
aufgeführten Anforderungen erfüllt sind. Angaben zu Nennleistung und Leistungsbedarf finden sich in den
Installationsanweisungen für das jeweilige Netzteil (Power Supply Unit, PSU).

Folgende Anforderungen müssen unbedingt erfüllt sein:

● Netzteile nur an vorschriftsmäßig geerdete Steckdosen anschließen, um die Gefahr elektrischer


Schläge zu vermeiden und die Konformität mit internationalen Sicherheitsnormen zu gewährleisten.
● Nur Stromkabel verwenden, die für den Einsatz in dem jeweiligen Land zugelassen sind.
Wechselstromkabel dürfen nicht manipuliert werden.
● Die Wandsteckdose muss in der Nähe der Anlage installiert und leicht zugänglich sein, um eine
schnelle Trennung vom Netz zu ermöglichen.
● Spannung und Frequenz der Steckdose müssen den elektrischen Nenndaten des Systems
entsprechen. Das Gebäude bzw. die Stromquelle muss mit einem Überlastschutz ausgestattet sein.
● Einen Spannungsstoßunterdrücker, einen Netzfilter oder eine unterbrechungsfreie Stromversorgung
verwenden, um das System vor einer vorübergehenden Zu- oder Abnahme der elektrischen Leistung
zu schützen.
● Bei laufendem Betrieb austauschbare Netzteile: Das Netzteil vorsichtig, nicht mit Kraft in das
Aufnahmefach einsetzen.
● Bei Einsatz mehrer Netzteile in einem Switch sind die Netzteile jeweils an unterschiedliche,
unabhängige Stromquellen anzuschließen. Auf diese Weise ist bei einem Ausfall einer einzelnen
Stromquelle nur das daran angeschlossene Netzteil betroffen. Wenn alle Netzteile eines einzelnen
Switch an dieselbe Stromquelle angeschlossen sind, ist der gesamte Switch für einen Ausfall der
Stromversorgung anfällig.

Leistungsspezifikationen für Netzteile von Extreme Networks finden sich in Appendix B dieses
Dokuments oder im Netzteil-Datenblatt unter http://www.extremenetworks.com.

Wartungssicherheit
Folgende Vorsichtsmaßnahmen müssen getroffen werden:

● Nur für den Einsatz mit diesem System zugelassene Originalzubehörteile bzw. -komponenten
verwenden. Die Nichtbeachtung dieser Anweisungen kann zu Schäden an der Ausrüstung oder
sogar zu einem Verstoß gegen die erforderlichen Sicherheitsbestimmungen und EMV-Vorschriften
führen.
● Die Abdeckung der Grundplatte darf nur durch Personal von Extreme Networks entfernt werden.
Das System enthält keine vom Kunden zu wartenden Komponenten. Reparaturen am System sind
von einem Werkstechniker von Extreme Networks durchzuführen.
● Der An-/Aus-Schalter des Systems darf nicht die gesamte Stromversorgung zum System
unterbrechen. Zur Unterbrechung der Wechselstromversorgung zum System müssen alle Stromkabel
aus den Wandsteckdosen gezogen werden. Das Stromkabel dient zur Trennung von der
Netzstromversorgung.
● Vor dem Entfernen der Rückwand eines Extreme Networks-Switch muss die gesamte Stromzufuhr
unterbrochen werden.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 267


Safety Information

● Vor der Aufnahme von Arbeiten in der Nähe von Stromquellen alle Stromkabel abziehen, sofern
nicht im Rahmen eines Wartungsverfahrens anders vorgegeben.
● Beim Umgang mit Modulen, optischen Geräten, Netzteilen oder anderen modularen Zubehörteilen
das ESD-Schutzarmband anlegen, um das Risiko einer Beschädigung der Geräte durch
elektrostatische Entladungen zu verringern. Das Armband zum Schutz elektrostatisch gefährdeter
Bauteile (ESB) grundsätzlich an der Grundplatte befestigt lassen, damit es beim Umgang mit diesen
Bauteilen immer zur Hand ist.
● Alle Kabel so verlegen, dass übermäßige Belastungen vermieden werden. Kabelbinder oder
Zugentlastungsklemmen verwenden.
● Ein Stromkabel bei Anzeichen von Beschädigungen unverzüglich austauschen.

Allgemeine Sicherheitsvorkehrungen
Folgende Richtlinien sind unbedingt zu befolgen:

● Keine Gegenstände heben, die möglicherweise zu schwer sind.


● Bei einer Installation in einem Gestell darauf achten, dass schwere Geräte unten im Gestell
eingebaut werden, um Gefahren durch Umkippen zu vermeiden.
● Bei Summit Desktop-Switches keinen Monitor oder andere Gegenstände auf die Anlage stellen. Die
Abdeckung der Grundplatte ist nicht darauf ausgelegt, Gewicht zu tragen.
● Nur Werkzeuge und Ausrüstung verwenden, die sich in einwandfreiem Zustand befinden. Keine
Ausrüstung verwenden, die sichtbare Beschädigungen aufweist.
● Schutz ESD-gefährdeter Bauteile: Zum Schutz ESD-gefährdeter Bauteile grundsätzlich vor der
Aufnahme von Arbeiten an Leiterplatten oder Modulen ein Armband anlegen. Leiterplatten nur in
antistatischer Verpackung transportieren. Vor der Aufnahme von Arbeiten an Leiterplatten diese
immer auf einer geerdeten Fläche ablegen.
● Verlegen von Kabeln: Kabel so verlegen, dass keine Schäden entstehen oder Unfälle, z. B. durch
Stolpern, verursacht werden können.

Erfüllen der Anforderungen an die Stromversorgung

LAN-Systeme

WARNHINWEIS!
Diese Ausrüstung ist für den Einsatz im Gebäudeinneren gedacht. Anschlüsse im Gebäudeinneren sind als
Kabelführungen definiert, die in demselben Gebäude wie das Gerät untergebracht sind.

Diese Ausrüstung kann zur Verbindung zwischen Gebäuden verwendet werden, sofern eine der
folgenden Bedingungen erfüllt wird:
● Die Länge von zwischen Gebäuden verlaufenden Kabelführungen beträgt weniger als 42,6 m (140
Fuß).
● Zwischen Gebäuden verlaufende Kabelführungen werden direkt unterirdisch verlegt.
● Kabelführungen zwischen Gebäuden verlaufen in einem unterirdischen Kabelkanal, wobei eine
durchgehende Kabelabschirmung oder ein durchgehender Kanal aus Metall zur Aufnahme des
Kabels an das Erdungselektrodensystem jedes Gebäudes angeschlossen ist.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 268


Fiber Optic Ports—Optical Safety

PoE-Geräte
Beim Anschluss von „Power over Ethernet“-Geräten (PoE) an einen PoE-Switch müssen sich alle
Verbindungen zwischen dem PoE-Gerät und dem Switch innerhalb desselben Gebäudes befinden, und
es muss ein Energieverteilungssystem für Niederspannung gemäß IEEE 802.3af verwendet werden.

Anforderungen an unterbrechungsfreie Netzteile


Ein unterbrechungsfreies Netzteil (Unterruptible Power Supply, UPS) ist ein Gerät, das zwischen eine
Stromquelle (z. B. eine Steckdose) und ein Gerät (z. B. ein Switch) geschaltet ist und verhindern soll,
dass die Leistungsfähigkeit des Gerätes durch Stromaus- und abfälle, Stromstöße und schädliche
Oberwellen beeinträchtigt wird.

UPS-Merkmale.
Ein unterbrechungsfreies Netzteil (UPS) kann normalerweise folgende Funktionen übernehmen:
● Auffangen relativ kleiner Stromstöße
● Dämpfen der Störungen aus Stromquellen
● Aufrechterhaltung der Stromversorgung zum Gerät bei Leitungsabfällen
● Aufrechterhaltung der Stromversorgung über einen gewissen Zeitraum nach Auftreten eines
allgemeinen Stromausfalls

Darüber hinaus bieten einige UPS oder Kombinationen aus UPS und Software folgende Funktionen:
● Automatisches Abschalten des Gerätes während längerer Stromausfälle
● Überwachung und Aufzeichnung des Stromversorgungsstatus
● Anzeige der Spannung (Stromaufnahme) des Gerätes
● Neustart des Gerätes nach einem längeren Stromausfall
● Anzeige der momentanen Leitungsspannung
● Ausgabe von Alarmen bei bestimmten Fehlerzuständen
● Kurzschlussschutz

Berechnung der Anforderungen an die Stromstärke.


Zur Berechnung der Leistung des erforderlichen UPS ist folgendermaßen vorzugehen:
1 Zur Ermittlung der Voltamperezahl (VA) sind zunächst die Anforderungen an Spannung und
Stromstärke für jedes einzelne Gerät der Anlage festzustellen. Diese Angaben sind üblicherweise auf
einem Aufkleber auf der Rück- oder Unterseite der Geräte angegeben. Anschließend sind die Zahlen
zur Ermittlung der Voltamperezahl zu multiplizieren:
VA = Volt x Ampere
2 Die insgesamt erforderliche VA-Zahl wird durch Addieren der VA-Zahlen der einzelnen Geräte der
Anlage ermittelt.
Zur Bestimmung der Mindestamperezahl für Ihr UPS wird empfohlen, die Gesamtzahl um 30 % zu
erhöhen.

UPS-Übergangszeit.
Die Übergangszeit ist die Zeit, die das unterbrechungsfreie Netzteil benötigt, um von der öffentlichen
Netzstromversorgung auf vollständige Batteriestromversorgung umzuschalten. Bei Produkten von
Extreme Networks ist eine Übergangszeit von unter 20 Millisekunden für eine optimale Leistung
erforderlich.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 269


Safety Information

Auswahl der Stromkabel


Je nachdem, welchen Switch Sie erworben haben, werden die Wechselstromnetzteile von Extreme
Networks entweder nur mit einem 110-VAC-Kabel oder mit einem 110-VAC-Kabel und einem 208/220-
VAC-Kabel geliefert. Die von Extreme Networks gelieferten Stromkabel sind nur für den Einsatz in den
Vereinigten Staaten und Kanada ausgelegt und zugelassen. Stromkabel für den Einsatz außerhalb der
Vereinigten Staaten und Kanada werden normalerweise von einem Drittanbieter geliefert und müssen
die folgenden Anforderungen erfüllen:

● Die Stromkabel müssen offiziell für das Land zugelassen sein, in dem sie verwendet werden sollen.
● Die Stromkabel müssen mit einem für das Einsatzland zugelassenen Wandsteckkontakt mit der
geeigneten Nennleistung ausgerüstet sein.
● Die Konfiguration der Steckvorrichtung (die Steckverbindung zur Einheit, nicht zur Wandsteckdose)
muss für eine Gerätesteckdose gemäß EN60320/IEC320-C14 ausgeführt sein.
● Die Länge der Stromkabel muss weniger als 5 m (15 Fuß) betragen.
● Die Mindestspezifikation für das flexible Kabel lautet Nr. 16 AWG (1,0 mm2), verseiltes Kupfer, Typ
SVT oder SJT, HAR oder äquivalent, 3-adrig.

Verwenden Sie immer ein Wechselstromkabel, das den Vorschriften Ihres Landes entspricht. Erkundigen
Sie sich über die örtlichen Vorschriften für Elektroinstallationen und fragen Sie bei den zuständigen
Aufsichtsbehörden nach den Anforderungen an Stromkabel. Ausführliche Spezifikationen für die
Stromversorgung finden sich im Netzteil-Datenblatt unter
http://www.extremenetworks.com oder in Appendix B dieses Dokuments.

WARNHINWEIS!
Vor dem Anschließen des Wechselstromkabels an ein Netzteil muss sichergestellt werden, dass die Steckdose
vorschriftsgemäß geerdet ist.

Für die unten aufgeführten Länder gelten zusätzlich folgende Anforderungen:

● Argentinien: Der Netzstecker muss den argentinischen Standards entsprechen.


● Australien: Versorgungssteckdose, 15 A Minimum, AS 3112 für 110/220-VAC-Netzteile
● Dänemark: Der Netzstecker muss die in Abschnitt 107-2-D1 der Norm DK2-1a oder DK2-5a
aufgeführten Bestimmungen erfüllen.
● Japan:
● Versorgungssteckdose, 15 A, JIS 8303 für 110/220-VAC-Netzteile.
● Das mit dem Netzteil, dem Switch oder der Grundplatte gelieferte Verbindungskabel ist nur für
den Einsatz mit dem spezifischen Produkt von Extreme Networks vorgesehen und darf nicht mit
anderen Geräten von Extreme Networks oder anderen Anbietern verwendet werden.
● Nordamerika: Versorgungssteckdose, 15 A, NEMA 5-15 für 110-VAC-Netzteile und NEMA L6-15P
für 208/220-VAC-Netzteile
● Schweiz: Der Netzstecker muss der Richtlinie SEV/ASE 1011 entsprechen.
● Großbritannien: Versorgungssteckdose, 15 A, BS 1363 für 110/220-VAC-Netzteile
● International: Versorgungssteckdose, 15 A, CEE 7/7 für 110/220-VAC-Netzteile
● Nur Frankreich und Peru:

Diese Einheit kann nicht über IT†-Netzteile mit Strom versorgt werden. Wenn Ihre Netzteile vom Typ IT
sind, muss dieses Gerät mit 230 V (2P+T) unter Verwendung eines Trenntrafos mit einem Verhältnis von

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 270


Fiber Optic Ports—Optical Safety

1:1 versorgt werden. Der zweite Anschlusspunkt muss als neutral definiert und direkt an die Erde
angeschlossen werden.

HINWEIS
Die Bauvorschriften sind weltweit verschieden; Extreme Networks empfiehlt daher ausdrücklich, einen
Elektroinstallateur zu beauftragen, um die sachgemäße Geräteerdung und Stromverteilung für Ihre spezifische
Installation sicherzustellen.

Austauschen und Entsorgen von Batterien


Im Umgang mit Batterien sind folgende Hinweise zu beachten:

● Austauschen der Lithium-Batterie: Die in diesem Gerät enthaltenen Batterien können nicht vom
Anwender ausgetauscht werden. Wenden Sie sich für einen Austausch des kompletten Gerätes bitte
an die Servicemitarbeiter von Extreme. Sollte der Versuch eines Austausches unternommen werden,
sind zur Vermeidung einer Explosionsgefahr folgende Richtlinien zu beachten:
● 1) Die Batterie nur durch eine identische oder eine gleichwertige, vom Hersteller empfohlene
Batterie ersetzen.
● 2) Die Batterie gemäß dem Empfehlungen des Herstellers entsorgen.

Lichtleiteranschlüsse: Optische Sicherheit


WARNHINWEIS!
Beim Umgang mit Lichtleitermodulen sind folgende Vorsichtsmaßnahmen zu beachten:

● Niemals durch ein Vergrößerungsgerät auf die übertragende LED/den Laser schauen, wenn diese(r)
eingeschaltet ist.
● Niemals direkt auf einen Lichtleiteranschluss am Switch oder auf die Enden eines Faserkabels schauen,
wenn diese eingeschaltet sind.
● Bei offenen Anschlüssen kann es zu unsichtbarer Laserstrahlung kommen. Direkter Augenkontakt mit dem
Strahl ist zu vermeiden.

WARNHINWEIS!
Die von Extreme gelieferten optischen Module sind Lasergeräte der Klasse 1 und konform mit 21 CFR Kapitel 1,
Unterkapitel J, 1040.10 und LN #50 7-2001.

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 271


Safety Information

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 272


B Technical Specifications

This appendix includes the following techinical specifications:

● BlackDiamond 10800 Series of Switches on page 273


● BlackDiamond 8810 Switch on page 276
● BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Switch on page 279
● Power Supply Specifications for the BlackDiamond 8800 Series of Switches, BlackDiamond 10800
Series of Switches, and the BlackDiamond 12804 Switch on page 282
● Summit X450 Series of Switches on page 283

Please note that the power supply specifications for the BlackDiamond family of switches are
consolidated into one table: Table 44.

BlackDiamond 10800 Series of Switches

Table 41: BlackDiamond 10800 series switch technical specifications


Physical Dimensions
BlackDiamond 10800 Chassis Height: 38.5 inches (98 cm)
Width: 17.3 inches (44 cm)
Depth: 21.0 inches (53.3 cm)
Power Supply Height: 4.75 inches (12.07 cm)
Width: 2.75 inches (6.99 cm)
Depth: 13.75 inches (34.93 cm)
BlackDiamond 10800 MSM Height: 22.7 inches (57.7 cm)
Width: 1.7 inches (4.3 cm)
Depth: 17.9 inches (45.5 cm)
BlackDiamond 10800 I/O Module Height: 22.7 inches (57.7 cm)
Width: 1.7 inches (4.3 cm)
Depth: 19.6 inches (49.8 cm)

Weight
BlackDiamond 10800 Chassis 105 lb (47.7 kg)
Empty
BlackDiamond 10800 Chassis 242 lb (110 kg)
Fully Loaded
Power Supply 7 lb (3.2 kg)
BlackDiamond 10800 MSM 10.7 lb (4.9 kg)
BlackDiamond 10800 I/O Module 9.25 lb (4.2 kg)

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 273


Technical Specifications

Table 41: BlackDiamond 10800 series switch technical specifications


Safety Standards
North American Safety of ITE ● UL 60950-1:2003 1st Ed., Listed Device (US)
● CSA 22.2#60950-1-03 1st Ed.(Canada)
● Complies with FCC 21CFR 1040.10 (US Laser Safety)
● CDRH Letter of Approval (US FDA Approval)
● NOM/NYCE (Mexico)
● IEEE 802.3af 6-2003 Environment A for PoE Applications
European Safety of ITE ● EN60950-1:2001
● EN 60825-1+A2:2001 (Lasers Safety)
● TUV-R GS Mark by German Notified Body
● 73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive
International Safety of ITE ● CB Report & Certificate per IEC 60950-1:2001+All Country Deviations
● AS/NZX 3260 (Australia /New Zealand)

EMI/EMC Standards
North America EMC for ITE ● FCC CFR 47 part 15 Class A (USA)
● ICES-003 Class A (Canada)
European EMC standards ● EN 55022:1998 Class A
● EN 55024:1998 Class A includes IEC 61000-4-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 11
● EN 61000-3-2,3 (Harmonics & Flicker)
● ETSI EN 300 386:2001 (EMC Telecommunications)
● 89/336/EEC EMC Directive
International EMC Certifications ● CISPR 22:1997 Class A (International Emissions)
● CISPR 24:1997 Class A (International Immunity)
● IEC/EN 61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge, 8kV Contact, 15kV Air, Criteria
A
● IEC/EN 61000-4-3 Radiated Immunity 10V/m, Criteria A
● IEC/EN 61000-4-4 Transient Burst, 1kV, Criteria A
● IEC/EN 61000-4-5 Surge, 2kV, 4kV, Criteria A
● IEC/EN 61000-4-6 Conducted Immunity, 0.15-80MHz, 10V/m unmod.
RMS, Criteria A
● IEC/EN 61000-4-11 Power Dips & Interruptions, >30%, 25 periods, Criteria
C
Country Specific ● VCCI Class A (Japan Emissions)
● AS/NZS 3548 ACA (Australia Emissions)
● CNS 13438:1997 Class A (BSMI-Taiwan)
● MIC Mark, EMC Approval (Korea)

Telecom Standards ● ETSI EN 300 386:2001 (EMC Telecommunications)


● ETSI EN 300 019 (Environmental for Telecommunications)

Environmental Standards
Environmental ● EN/ETSI 300 019-2-1 v2.1.2 - Class 1.2 Storage
● EN/ETSI 300 019-2-2 v2.1.2 - Class 2.3 Transportation
● EN/ETSI 300 019-2-3 v2.1.2 - Class 3.1e Operational
● EN/ETSI 300 753 (1997-10) - Acoustic Noise
● ASTM D3580 Random Vibration Unpackaged 1.5G
Operating Conditions ● Operating Temperature Range 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
● Operating Humidity:10% to 93% relative humidity, non-condensing
● Operational Shock: 30 m/s2 (3g), 11ms, 60 Shocks
● Operational Sine Vibration: 5-100-5 Hz @ 0.2G, 0-Peak, 0.1 Oct./min.
● Operational Random Vibration: 3-500MHz @ 1.5g rms

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 274


BlackDiamond 10800 Series of Switches

Table 41: BlackDiamond 10800 series switch technical specifications


Storage & Transportation ● Transportation Temperature:-40 °C to 70 °C (-40 °F to 158 °F)
Conditions (Packaged) ● Storage and Transportation Humidity:10% to 93% relative humidity, non-
condensing
● Packaged Shock (Half Sine):
<50kg 180 m/s2 (10g), 6ms, 600 shocks, Blades
>50kg 100 m/s2 ( 6g), 11ms, 600 shocks, Chassis
● Packaged Random Vibration:
5-20 Hz @ 1.0 ASD w/-3dB/oct. from 20-200 Hz
● 14 drops min on sides & corners
@ 39.5" <22 Lbs (10kg) Blades
@ 11.8" <110 Lbs (50Kg) Chassis

Acoustic Sound (BD10808 with AC PSUs)


Sound Power in accordance with ● Sound Power
EN 300 753 (10-1997) Low: 71 dBA per ISO 7779
Normal: 80 dBA per ISO 7779
High: 85 dBA per ISO 7779
● Declared Sound Power
Low: 7.4 belsA per ISO 7779 & ISO 9296
Normal: 8.2 belsA per ISO 7779 & ISO 9296
High: 8.8 belsA per ISO 7779 & ISO 9296
Sound Pressure in accordance ● Bystander Sound Pressure
with NEBS GR-63 Issue 2 Low: 65 dBA front side @ .6m
Normal: 75 dBA rear side @ .6m
High: 81 dBA rear side @ .6m

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 275


Technical Specifications

BlackDiamond 8810 Switch


Table 42: BlackDiamond 8810 switch technical specifications
Physical Dimensions
BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis Height: 24.47 inches (62.2 cm)
Width: 17.51 inches (44.5 cm)
Depth: 18.23 inches (46.3 cm)
Power Supply Height: 4.75 inches (12.07 cm)
Width: 2.75 inches (6.99 cm)
Depth: 13.75 inches (34.93 cm)
BlackDiamond 8810 MSM Height: 1.63 inches (4.1 cm)
Width: 15.26 inches (38.8 cm)
Depth: 15.25 inches (38.7 cm)
BlackDiamond 8810 I/O Module Height: 1.63 inches (4.1 cm)
Width: 15.26 inches (38.8 cm)
Depth: 15.25 inches (38.7 cm)
BlackDiamond 8810 Fan Tray Height: 18 inches (45.72 cm)
Width: 1.25 inches (3.175 cm)
Depth: 16.5 inches (41.91 cm)
BlackDiamond 8810 PSU/Fan Height: 2 inches (45.72 cm)
Controller Width: 5.1 inches (3.175 cm)
Depth: 7.85 inches (41.91 cm)
BlackDiamond 8810 Blank Front Height: 1.7 inches
Panel Width: 16.25 inches
Depth: 1.6 inches
BlackDiamond 8810 Mid-Mount Height: 24.4 inches
Kit Width: .975 inches
Depth: .725 inches

Weight
BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis 79 lb (35.8 kg)
Empty
BlackDiamond 8810 Chassis 196 lb (88.9 kg)
Fully Loaded
Power Supply 7 lb (3.2 kg)
BlackDiamond 8810 Fan Tray 6.75 lb (3.06 kg)
BlackDiamond 8810 PSU/Fan 1.75 lb (.79 kg)
Controller

Safety Standards
North American Safety of ITE ● UL 60950-1:2003 1st Ed., Listed Device (US)
● CSA 22.2#60950-1-03 1st Ed.(Canada)
● Complies with FCC 21CFR 1040.10 (US Laser Safety)
● CDRH Letter of Approval (US FDA Approval)
● NOM/NYCE (Mexico)
● IEEE 802.3af 6-2003 Environment A for PoE Applications
European Safety of ITE ● EN60950-1:2001
● EN 60825-1+A2:2001 (Lasers Safety)
● TUV-R GS Mark by German Notified Body
● 73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive
International Safety of ITE ● CB Report & Certificate per IEC 60950-1:2001+All Country Deviations
● AS/NZX 3260 (Australia /New Zealand)

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 276


BlackDiamond 8810 Switch

Table 42: BlackDiamond 8810 switch technical specifications


EMI/EMC Standards
North America EMC for ITE ● FCC CFR 47 part 15 Class A (USA)
● ICES-003 Class A (Canada)
European EMC standards ● EN 55022:1998 Class A
● EN 55024:1998 Class A includes IEC 61000-4-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 11
● EN 61000-3-2,3 (Harmonics & Flicker)
● ETSI EN 300 386:2001 (EMC Telecommunications)
● 89/336/EEC EMC Directive
International EMC Certifications ● CISPR 22:1997 Class A (International Emissions)
● CISPR 24:1997 Class A (International Immunity)
● IEC/EN 61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge, 8kV Contact, 15kV Air, Criteria
A
● IEC/EN 61000-4-3 Radiated Immunity 10V/m, Criteria A
● IEC/EN 61000-4-4 Transient Burst, 1kV, Criteria A
● IEC/EN 61000-4-5 Surge, 2kV, 4kV, Criteria A
● IEC/EN 61000-4-6 Conducted Immunity, 0.15-80MHz, 10V/m unmod.
RMS, Criteria A
● IEC/EN 61000-4-11 Power Dips & Interruptions, >30%, 25 periods, Criteria
C
Country Specific ● VCCI Class A (Japan Emissions)
● AS/NZS 3548 ACA (Australia Emissions)
● CNS 13438:1997 Class A (BSMI-Taiwan)
● MIC Mark, EMC Approval (Korea)

Telecom Standards ● ETSI EN 300 386:2001 (EMC Telecommunications)


● ETSI EN 300 019 (Environmental for Telecommunications)

Environmental Standards
Environmental ● EN/ETSI 300 019-2-1 v2.1.2 - Class 1.2 Storage
● EN/ETSI 300 019-2-2 v2.1.2 - Class 2.3 Transportation
● EN/ETSI 300 019-2-3 v2.1.2 - Class 3.1e Operational
● EN/ETSI 300 753 (1997-10) - Acoustic Noise
● ASTM D3580 Random Vibration Unpackaged 1.5G
Operating Conditions ● Operating Temperature Range 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
● Operating Humidity:10% to 93% relative humidity, non-condensing
● Operational Shock: 30 m/s2 (3g), 11ms, 60 Shocks
● Operational Sine Vibration: 5-100-5 Hz @ 0.2G, 0-Peak, 0.1 Oct./min.
● Operational Random Vibration: 3-500MHz @ 1.5g rms
Storage & Transportation ● Transportation Temperature:-40 °C to 70 °C (-40 °F to 158 °F)
Conditions (Packaged) ● Storage and Transportation Humidity:10% to 93% relative humidity, non-
condensing
● Packaged Shock (Half Sine):
<50kg 180 m/s2 (10g), 6ms, 600 shocks, Blades
>50kg 100 m/s2 ( 6g), 11ms, 600 shocks, Chassis
● Packaged Random Vibration:
5-20 Hz @ 1.0 ASD w/-3dB/oct. from 20-200 Hz
● 14 drops min on sides & corners
@ 39.5" <22 Lbs (10kg) Blades
@ 11.8" <110 Lbs (50Kg) Chassis

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 277


Technical Specifications

Table 42: BlackDiamond 8810 switch technical specifications


Acoustic Sound (BD8810 with AC PSUs)
Sound Power in accordance with ● Sound Power
EN 300 753 (10-1997) Normal: 70 dBA per ISO 7779
High: 75 dBA per ISO 7779
● Declared Sound Power
Normal: 7.2 belsA per ISO 7779 & ISO 9296
High: 7.7 belsA per ISO 7779 & ISO 9296
Sound Pressure in accordance ● Bystander Sound Pressure
with NEBS GR-63 Issue 2 Normal: 64 dBA front side @ .6m
High: 67 dBA rear side @ .6m

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 278


BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Switch

BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Switch


Table 43: BlackDiamond 8806 and BlackDiamond 12804 switch technical specifications
Physical Dimensions
BlackDiamond 8806 Chassis Height: 17.47 inches (44.4 cm)
BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis Width: 17.51 inches (44.5 cm)
Depth: 18.12 inches (46.0 cm)
Power Supply Height: 4.75 inches (12.07 cm)
Width: 2.75 inches (6.99 cm)
Depth: 13.75 inches (34.93 cm)
BlackDiamond 8806 MSM Height: 1.63 inches (4.1 cm)
BlackDiamond 12804 MSM Width: 15.26 inches (38.8 cm)
Depth: 15.25 inches (38.7 cm)
BlackDiamond 8806 I/O Module Height: 1.63 inches (4.1 cm)
BlackDiamond 12804 I/O Module Width: 15.26 inches (38.8 cm)
Depth: 15.25 inches (38.7 cm)
BlackDiamond 8806 Fan Tray Height: 11.5 inches (29.2 cm)
BlackDiamond 12804 Fan Tray Width: 1.25 inches (3.1 cm)
Depth: 16.5 inches (41.9 cm)
BlackDiamond 8806 PSU/Fan Height: 2 inches (5.1 cm)
Controller Width: 5.1 inches (13.0 cm)
BlackDiamond 12804 PSU/Fan Depth: 7.85 inches (19.9 cm)
Controller
BlackDiamond 8806 Blank Front Height: 1.7 inches (4.3 cm)
Panel Width: 16.25 inches (41.3 cm)
BlackDiamond 12804 Blank Depth: 1.6 inches (4.1 cm)
Front Panel

Weight
BlackDiamond 8806 Chassis 63.75 lb (29.0 kg)
Empty
BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis
Empty
BlackDiamond 8806 Chassis 153 lb (69.5 kg)
Fully Loaded
BlackDiamond 12804 Chassis
Fully Loaded
Power Supply 7 lb (3.2 kg)
BlackDiamond 8806 Fan Tray 4.75 lb (2.2 kg)
BlackDiamond 12804 Fan Tray
BlackDiamond 8806 PSU/Fan 1.75 lb (.79 kg)
Controller
BlackDiamond 12804 PSU/Fan
Controller

Safety Standards
North American Safety of ITE ● UL 60950-1:2003 1st Ed., Listed Device (US)
● CSA 22.2#60950-1-03 1st Ed.(Canada)
● Complies with FCC 21CFR 1040.10 (US Laser Safety)
● CDRH Letter of Approval (US FDA Approval)
● NOM/NYCE (Mexico)
● IEEE 802.3af 6-2003 Environment A for PoE Applications

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 279


Technical Specifications

European Safety of ITE ● EN60950-1:2001


● EN 60825-1+A2:2001 (Lasers Safety)
● TUV-R GS Mark by German Notified Body
● 73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive
International Safety of ITE ● CB Report & Certificate per IEC 60950-1:2001+All Country Deviations
● AS/NZX 3260 (Australia /New Zealand)

EMI/EMC Standards
North America EMC for ITE ● FCC CFR 47 part 15 Class A (USA)
● ICES-003 Class A (Canada)
European EMC standards ● EN 55022:1998 Class A
● EN 55024:1998 Class A includes IEC 61000-4-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 11
● EN 61000-3-2,3 (Harmonics & Flicker)
● ETSI EN 300 386:2001 (EMC Telecommunications)
● 89/336/EEC EMC Directive
International EMC Certifications ● CISPR 22:1997 Class A (International Emissions)
● CISPR 24:1997 Class A (International Immunity)
● IEC/EN 61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge, 8kV Contact, 15kV Air, Criteria
A
● IEC/EN 61000-4-3 Radiated Immunity 10V/m, Criteria A
● IEC/EN 61000-4-4 Transient Burst, 1kV, Criteria A
● IEC/EN 61000-4-5 Surge, 2kV, 4kV, Criteria A
● IEC/EN 61000-4-6 Conducted Immunity, 0.15-80MHz, 10V/m unmod.
RMS, Criteria A
● IEC/EN 61000-4-11 Power Dips & Interruptions, >30%, 25 periods, Criteria
C
Country Specific ● VCCI Class A (Japan Emissions)
● AS/NZS 3548 ACA (Australia Emissions)
● CNS 13438:1997 Class A (BSMI-Taiwan)
● MIC Mark, EMC Approval (Korea)

Telecom Standards ● ETSI EN 300 386:2001 (EMC Telecommunications)


● ETSI EN 300 019 (Environmental for Telecommunications)

Environmental Standards
Environmental ● EN/ETSI 300 019-2-1 v2.1.2 - Class 1.2 Storage
● EN/ETSI 300 019-2-2 v2.1.2 - Class 2.3 Transportation
● EN/ETSI 300 019-2-3 v2.1.2 - Class 3.1e Operational
● EN/ETSI 300 753 (1997-10) - Acoustic Noise
Operating Conditions ● Operating Temperature Range 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
● Operating Humidity:10% to 93% relative humidity, non-condensing
● Operating Altitude 0-3000 meters (9,850ft)
● Operational Shock: 30 m/s2 (3g), 11ms, 60 Shocks
● Operational Random Vibration: 5-500 Hz @ 1.5g rms
Storage & Transportation ● Transportation Temperature:-40 °C to 70 °C (-40 °F to 158 °F)
Conditions (Packaged) ● Storage and Transportation Humidity:10% to 93% relative humidity, non-
condensing
● Packaged Shock (Half Sine):
<50kg 180 m/s2 (10g), 6ms, 600 shocks, Blades
>50kg 100 m/s2 ( 6g), 11ms, 600 shocks, Chassis
● Packaged Random Vibration:
5-20 Hz @ 1.0 ASD w/-3dB/oct. from 20-200 Hz
● Packaged Sinusoidal Vibration:
5-62 Hz, 5mm/s Velocity, 62-200 Hz, .2G
● Tilt: 22.5 degrees and return to position
● 14 drops min on sides & corners
@ 39.4" <20 Lbs (9kg) Blades
@ 19.7" <80 Lbs (36Kg) Chassis

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 280


BlackDiamond 8806/12804 Switch

Acoustic Sound (BD8806/12804 with AC PSUs)


Sound Power in accordance with ● Sound Power
EN 300 753 (10-1997) Normal: 70 dBA per ISO 7779
High: 73 dBA per ISO 7779
● Declared Sound Power
Normal: 7.2 belsA per ISO 7779 & ISO 9296
High: 7.6 belsA per ISO 7779 & ISO 9296
Sound Pressure in accordance ● Bystander Sound Pressure
with NEBS GR-63 Issue 2 Normal: 64 dBA front side @ .6m
High: 66 dBA left side @ .6m

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 281


Technical Specifications

Power Supply Specifications for the BlackDiamond


Family of Switches

Table 44: Power Supply Specifications for the BlackDiamond 8800 Series of Switches,
BlackDiamond 10800 Series of Switches, and the BlackDiamond 12804 Switch
Power Supply Specifications
AC SSI PS Model #60020
Typical configuration 3 PSUs
Full configuration 6 PSUs
Input ● AC Voltage Input Range: 90-264 V AC
● Maximum Input Amperages:
7 A @ 200 V AC (high-line)
10 A @ 90 V AC (low-line)
● AC Line Frequency: 47 to 63 Hz
● PS Input Socket: IEC 320 C14
2
● Minimum Wire Size: 16 AWG (1.31mm ) copper
stranded
Output ● DC Output: 48 V DC, 24 A DC / 12 V DC,
4 A (high-line) 48 V DC, 13.5 A DC / 12 V DC,
4 A (low-line)
● DC Output Power (W: 700 / 1200 W

Power Supply Cord Selection Please refer to “Power Supply Cord Selection” on
page 263.
DC SSI PS Model#60021
Typical configuration 3 PSUs
Full configuration 6 PSUs
Input ● Nominal input voltage: -48 VDC , -60 VDC
● Voltage input range: -40.5 VDC to -72 VDC
● Input currents:
-40 VDC @ 35 A
-48 VDC @ 30 A
-60 VDC @ 23 A
● Maximum in-rush current: Not more than 80 A for
5 ms
● Input circuit protection: 50 A

Wire harness provided by Extreme Networks with


each PS. Extreme Part# 4340-00028
2
● Wire type: 8 AWG (10 mm ) Listed Tray Cable,
copper-stranded rated @ 90 C min
● Connector: Molex Connector PN#42816-0312
● Connector Pins: Molex Connector Pins PN#42815-
0032
Output ● -48 VDC output: 1150 W
● -12 VDC output: 50 W

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 282


Summit X450 Series of Switches

Summit X450 Series of Switches

Table 45: Summit X450 Series switch technical specifications


Physical Dimensions
Summit Chassis Height: 1.73 inches (4.4 cm)
Width: 17.36 inches (44.1 cm)
Depth: 16.38 inches (41.6 cm)

Weight
Summit X450-24t Chassis Empty 14 lb (6.35 kg)
Summit X450-24x Chassis Empty 13.8 lb (6.26 kg)

Power
Summit Chassis Auto-ranging 100 V-240 V AC, 50 - 60 Hz
Min Voltage/Associated Current 1.5 A at 100 V
Max Voltage/Associated Current 1 A at 240 V AC
Line Frequency 50 to 60 Hz
Heat Dissipation, Watts/BTU 160 W / 546 BTU/hr
Power Supply Cord Selection Please refer to “Power Supply Cord Selection” on page 263.

Power Supply - EPS-160


Min Voltage/Associated Current 4 A at 100 V AC
Max Voltage/Associated Current 2 A at 240 V AC
Line Frequency 50 to 60 Hz
Heat Dissipation, Watts/BTU 160 W / 546 BTU/hr
AC Power Supply Input Socket IEC 320 C14
Minimum Wire Size 16 AWG (1.0mm2) copper stranded
Output 11 A 12 V
1.5 A 5 V
Power Supply Cord Selection Please refer to “Power Supply Cord Selection” on page 263.

Safety Standards
North American Safety of ITE ● UL 60950-1:2003 1st Ed., Listed Device (US)
● CSA 22.2#60950-1-03 1st Ed.(Canada)
● Complies with FCC 21CFR 1040.10 (US Laser Safety)
● CDRH Letter of Approval (US FDA Approval)
● NOM/NYCE (Mexico)
● IEEE 802.3af 6-2003 Environment A for PoE Applications
European Safety of ITE ● EN60950-1:2001
● EN 60825-1+A2:2001 (Lasers Safety)
● TUV-R GS Mark by German Notified Body
● 73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive
International Safety of ITE ● CB Report & Certificate per IEC 60950-1:2001+All Country Deviations
● AS/NZX 3260 (Australia /New Zealand)

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 283


Technical Specifications

Table 45: Summit X450 Series switch technical specifications


EMI/EMC Standards
North America EMC for ITE ● FCC CFR 47 part 15 Class A (USA)
● ICES-003 Class A (Canada)
European EMC standards ● EN 55022:1998 Class A
● EN 55024:1998 Class A includes IEC 61000-4-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 11
● EN 61000-3-2,3 (Harmonics & Flicker)
● ETSI EN 300 386:2001 (EMC Telecommunications)
● 89/336/EEC EMC Directive
International EMC Certifications ● CISPR 22:1997 Class A (International Emissions)
● CISPR 24:1997 Class A (International Immunity)
● IEC/EN 61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge, 8kV Contact, 15kV Air, Criteria
A
● IEC/EN 61000-4-3 Radiated Immunity 10V/m, Criteria A
● IEC/EN 61000-4-4 Transient Burst, 1kV, Criteria A
● IEC/EN 61000-4-5 Surge, 2kV, 4kV, Criteria A
● IEC/EN 61000-4-6 Conducted Immunity, 0.15-80MHz, 10V/m unmod.
RMS, Criteria A
● IEC/EN 61000-4-11 Power Dips & Interruptions, >30%, 25 periods, Criteria
C
Country Specific ● VCCI Class A (Japan Emissions)
● AS/NZS 3548 ACA (Australia Emissions)
● CNS 13438:1997 Class A (BSMI-Taiwan)
● MIC Mark, EMC Approval (Korea)

Telecom Standards ● ETSI EN 300 386:2001 (EMC Telecommunications)


● ETSI EN 300 019 (Environmental for Telecommunications)

Environmental Standards
Environmental ● EN/ETSI 300 019-2-1 v2.1.2 - Class 1.2 Storage
● EN/ETSI 300 019-2-2 v2.1.2 - Class 2.3 Transportation
● EN/ETSI 300 019-2-3 v2.1.2 - Class 3.1e Operational
● EN/ETSI 300 753 (1997-10) - Acoustic Noise
● ASTM D3580 Random Vibration Unpackaged 1.5G
Operating Conditions ● Operating Temperature Range 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
● Operating Humidity:10% to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing
● Operational Shock (Half Sine): 30 m/s2 (3g), 11ms, 18 Shocks
● Operational Random Vibration: 3-500MHz @ 1.5g rms
Storage & Transportation ● Transportation Temperature:-40 °C to 70 °C (-40 °F to 158 °F)
Conditions (Packaged) ● Storage and Transportation Humidity:10% to 95% relative humidity, non-
condensing
2
● Packaged Shock (Half Sine): 100 m/s (6g), 6ms, 600 shocks
2 2
● Packaged Random Vibration: 5-200 Hz @ 1.0 ASD (1m /s ), w/-3dB/octive
● 14 drops min on sides & corners @ 36"(<15kg box)

Acoustic Sound (Summit X450-24t/SummitX450-24x)


Sound Power in accordance with ● Sound Power: 61 dBA per ISO 7779
EN 300 753 (10-1997) ● Declared Sound Power: 6.3 belsA per ISO 7779 & ISO 9296
Sound Pressure in accordance Bystander Sound Pressure: 49 dBA rear @ .6m
with NEBS GR-63 Issue 2

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 284


Index

Numerics chassis, installing, 191


components
10 Gbps optical transceiver, 54 fan tray, 229
10G2X module, 220 I/O modules, 214
10G4X module, 108 mini-GBICs, 44, 50
10G6X module, 219 MSM-1/MSM-1XL modules, 205
power supply controller, 233
A XENPAK module, 54
features, 43
AC power cord retainer channel bracket grounding, 194
BlackDiamond 12804 switch grounding terminals, location, 24
installing, 176 installation, verifying, 235
removing, 178 MAC address, 183
BlackDiamond 8806 switch mini-GBICs
installing, 176 troubleshooting, 49
removing, 178 MSM modules, 205
AC power cord retaining bracket power socket, 184
BlackDiamond 8810 switch rack measurement, 184
installing, 124 serial number, 183
removing, 126 specifications, 273
AC power supply units BlackDiamond 12804 switch
front panel, 63 AC power cord retainer channel bracket
fuse, 64 installing, 176
installing, 60 removing, 178
operating conditions, 65 architecture, 129
overview, 59 front view, 130
power supply cords, 64 rear view, 131
removing, 62 blank front panels, 146, 149
specifications, 62 chassis
airflow mid-mount kit assembly, 162
BlackDiamond switches mid-mount racking, 164
requirements, 21 rack mounting, 156
chassis (figure), 22 repacking, 159
diagram of (see figure), 22 unpacking, 154
alternate BootROM image, 104 components
amperage, calculating, 34, 262 I/O modules, 137
ANSI standards, 35 fan tray
Aspen 8810 See BlackDiamond 8810 switch, 11 installing, 169
removing, 167
B MAC address, 131
modules
bend radius
about, 133
fiber optic cable, 29
distinguishing MSM from I/O, 142
UTP cable, 27
I/O, 137
BICSI standards, 26
GM-20T module, 139
BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches
GM-20XT module, 139
accessories box, 186
GM-20XTR module, 140
blank front panels, 227
module LEDs, 138

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 285


Index

port LEDs, 138 MSM, troubleshooting, 81


XM-2X module, 141 serial number, 89
XM-2XR module, 141 software requirements, 81
installing, 142 BlackDiamond 8810 switch
MSM, 134 basic features, 92
activity, 134 blank front panels, 149
compact flash, 137 chassis
console port, 137 installing, 98
LEDs, 135 re-crating, 100–102
management port, 137 re-packing, 100–102
MSM-5, 136 components
MSM-5R, 136 mini-GBICs, 44, 50
reset, 137 XENPAK module, 54
removing, 145 features, 43
PSU fan controller grounding terminals, location, 24
installing, 174 installation, verifying, 235
removing, 172 MAC address, 93
safety, 129 mid-mount bracket, 97
serial number, 131 mid-mount kit, assembling, 97
BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches rack mounting, 98
blank front panels, 117, 149 repacking, 100
components serial number, 93
G8X MSM module, 103 slot and module capacities, 92
I/O modules, 107 spare fan tray, 120
distinguishing module types, 113 specifications, 276, 279
handles on MSMs and I/O modules, 115 tools required for installing, 96
hot-swapping MSMs and I/O modules, 116 unpacking
installing MSMs and I/O modules, 114 clip locks, 95
installing spare PSU/Fan controller, 174 blank front panels
MSM modules, 103 BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches
PSU/fan controller installing, 227
installing, 174 BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches and
removing, 172 BlackDiamond 12804 switch
removing spare PSU/Fan controller, 172 installing, 152
slots for I/O modules, 113 BlackDiamond 8800/BlackDiamond 12804
slots for MSMs, 113 switches
BlackDiamond 8806 switch removing, 150
AC power cord retainer channel bracket things to know, 150
installing, 176 building codes, 19
removing, 178 Building Industry Consulting Service Internation-
architecture, 87 al. See BICSI
front view, 88 bundling cable, 27
rear view, 89 buttons, BlackDiamond 8800 series of MSM, 104
blank front panels, 149
chassis C
mid-mount kit assembly, 162
mid-mount racking, 164 cable connections, making, 31
rack mounting, 156 cable identification records, 26
repacking, 159 cable labeling
unpacking, 154 identification, 26
fan tray recommendations, 26
installing, 169 records, 26
removing, 167 cable manager
MAC address, 89 BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches, 196

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 286


Index

BlackDiamond switches (all), 75 fan tray, 230


cable types and distances, 29 fan tray filter, 232
cable, category 5, 27 I/O modules, 226
cable, installing MSM, 211
bend radius BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches
fiber optic, 29 I/O modules, 116
UTP, 27 MSM, 116
distances, 29 BlackDiamond 8810 switch
fiber optic cable, 29 AC power cord retaining bracket, 126
recommendations, 27 fan tray, 119
slack, 27 external memory card, 58
cabling standards mini-GBIC, 49
ANSI, 35 XENPAK module, 55
BICSI, 26 console port
category 5 cable, 27 G8X MSM module, 104
caution icon, 12 MSM-1/MSM-1XL module, 206
chassis unpacking instructions, BlackDiamond MSM-5/MSM-5R module, 137
10800 series of switches, 188 settings, 37
chassis unpacking instructions, BlackDiamond conventions
8810, 94–96 notice icons, 12
chassis-to-chassis heating, 21 text, 12
checking the installation, 235 CX4 XENPAK, 245
commands
clear log static, 208 D
eject memory card, 57
show log, 48, 49 data ports, BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches
show memorycard, 57 MSM, 105
show slot, 225 DB-9 pinouts, 37
synchronize, 210 DC power supply units
commercial building standards, 35 dc wiring, 68
compact flash. See external memory card front panel, 73
components, installing installing PSU, 69
BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches, 191 installing wiring, 68
backup MSM, 210 LEDs, 73
blank front panel, 227 operating conditions, 74
cable manager, 196 overview, 67
fan tray, 231 power cable, 68
fan tray filter, 232 power distribution, 69
I/O modules, 223–?? removing PSU, 72
mid-rack mount, 193 safety, 67
MSM, 208 software requirements, 68
power supply controller, 234 specifications, 73
standard rack mount, 191 DC wiring, 68
BlackDiamond 8810 switch design standards, 35
AC power cord retaining bracket, 124 distribution rack
fan tray, 120 grounding, 24
helper bracket, 98 mechanical recommendations, 24
mid-mount, 98 mounting holes, 24
external memory card, 57 securing, 25
mini-GBIC, 49 service access, 25
XENPAK module space requirements, 25
inserting into slot, 55 dual 10 Gigabit uplinks
components, removing installation, 245
BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches dual-speed mini-GBIC

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 287


Index

optical system budget, 47 fiber optic cable


dual-speed mini-GBIC, specifications, 47 bend radius, 29
care, 29
E connections, making, 31
first switch log in, 39
electrical codes, 19 full-duplex, 44
electrostatic discharge. See ESD fuse, 64
environmental requirements
airflow, 21 G
building codes, 19
electrical codes, 19 G20X module, 217
humidity, 23 G24X module, 107
switch spacing, 21 G48P module, 110
temperature, 20 G48T module, 109
wiring closet, 20 G60T module, 215
EPS-160, 251 G60X module, 216
EPS-T, 251 G8X MSM module, 104
ER XENPAK, 51, 245 GM-20T module, 139
ESD GM-20XT module, 139
discharge from cable, 27 GM-20XTR module, 140
system protection, 23 grounding
ESD-preventive wrist strap, 23 BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches, 194
external compact flash slot racks, 24
G8X MSM module, 104 requirements, 35
MSM-1/MSM-1XL modules, 206 wiring closet, 20
MSM-5 and MSM-5R, 137 grounding terminals, location, 24
external memory card
description, 56 H
industrial grade, 256 MB, 56
installing, 57 heating, chassis-to-chassis, 21
removing, 58 helper bracket
uses of, 56 BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches, 187
External Power System, 251 BlackDiamond 12804 switch, 164
Extreme Networks switch airflow, 21 BlackDiamond 8806 switch, 164
BlackDiamond 8810 switch, 98
F high-line power, 62
humidity, 23
fan tray
BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches I
description, 229
filter replacement, 232 I/O modules
hot-swapping, 230 BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches
installing, 231 description, 214
removing, 230 hot-swapping, 223, 226
BlackDiamond 12804 switch installing, 223
installing, 169 LEDs, 223
removing, 167 removing, 226
BlackDiamond 8806 switch types
installing, 169 10G2X, 220
removing, 167 10G6X, 219
BlackDiamond 8810 switch 20X, 217
installing, 120 G60T, 215
removing, 119 G60X, 216
fan tray filter, installing, 232 verifying installation, 225

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 288


Index

BlackDiamond 12804 switch es, 207


description, 137 MSM, BlackDiamond 12804 switch, 135
GM-20T module, 139 MSM, BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches,
GM-20XT module, 139 106
GM-20XTR module, 140 PoE ports, BlackDiamond 8800 series of
installing, 142 switches
LEDs, 138 delivering inline power, 111
port LEDs, 138 ports, BlackDiamond 10800 series of switch-
removing, 145 es, 223
XM-2Xmodule, 141 ports, BlackDiamond 12804 switch, 138
XM-2XR module, 141 ports, BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches,
BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches 111
description, 107 power supply controller, 234
hot-swapping, 116 Summit X450 switch, 242
injector/ejector handles, 115 logging in the switch, 39
installing, 114 low-line power, 62
LEDs, 111 LR XENPAK, 51, 245
removing, 116 LRM-LR XENPAK, 53
types LX mini-GBIC
10G4X, 108 optical system budget, 45
G24X, 107 specifications, 45
G48P, 110 LX4 XENPAK, 52, 245
G48T, 109
PoE, 110 M
hot-swapping, 116
icons MAC address
caution, 12 BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches, 183
note, 12 BlackDiamond 12804 switch, 131
warning, 12 BlackDiamond 8806 switch, 89
indicators, shipping BlackDiamond 8810 switch, 93
shock watch, 94, 185 management module. See MSM
tilt watch, 94, 185 management port
industry standards, 35 caution, 44
initial switch log in, 39 description, 44
inline power G8X MSM module, 104
I/O module, 110 MSM-1/MSM-1XL modules, 206
LEDs, 111 MSM-5 and MSM-5R module, 137
installation memory card. See external memory card
optional hardware, 251 mid-mount racking. See rack installation
IP settings, configuring, 39 mini-GBIC
Extreme Networks certification, 49
L hot-swapping, 48
installation preparation, 48
labeling system for cables, 26 installing, 49
LAN systems, 32 interfaces, 44, 50
LAN systems, power requirements, 32 removing, 49
LEDs specifications
I/O modules, BlackDiamond 10800 series of 100FX/1000LX, 47
switches, 223 dual-speed, 47
I/O modules, BlackDiamond 12804 switch, LX, 45
138 SX, 45
I/O modules, BlackDiamond 8800 series of ZX, 46
switches, 111 Summit X450 switch, 44
MSM, BlackDiamond 10800 series of switch- troubleshooting, LEDs, 48

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 289


Index

mini-GBIC, troubleshooting, 49 null-modem cable pinouts, 38


modem port, 206
MSM, BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches O
booting, 207
console port, 206 operating environment requirements. See environ-
description, 205 mental requirements
dual MSMs, 207 optional hardware features, 251
external compact flash slot, 206 over-current conditions, preventing, 63
hot-swapping, 208
installation verification, 210 P
installing, 208
PC-AT serial null-modem cable pinouts, 38
LEDs, 207
pinouts
management port, 206
DB-9 console connector, 37
modem port, 206
null-modem cable, 38
MSM-1, 205
PC-AT serial null-modem cable, 38
MSM-1XL, 205
plenum-rated cable, 27
primary, backup functionality, 207
PoE
removing, 211
module, 110
saving configurations, 207
port LEDs, 111
MSM, BlackDiamond 12804 switch
PoE devices, power requirements, 33
booting, 135
ports
console port, 137
console port settings, 37
dual MSMs, 134
console, BlackDiamond 10800 series of
external compact flash slot, 137
switches, 206
installing, 142
console, BlackDiamond 12804 switch, 137
management port, 137
console, BlackDiamond 8800 series of switch-
primary, backup functionality, 134
es, 104
removing, 145
data, BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches
saving configurations, 134
MSM, 105
MSM, BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches
LEDs, BlackDiamond 10800 series of switch-
available slots, 105
es, 223
booting, 105
LEDs, BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches,
buttons, 104
111
console port, 104
management, 44
data ports, 105
management, BlackDiamond 10800 series of
dual MSMs, 105
switches, 206
external compact flash slot, 104
management, BlackDiamond 12804 switch,
G8X MSM, 103
137
hot-swapping, 116
management, BlackDiamond 8800 series of
LEDs, 106
switches, 104
management port, 104
modem, BlackDiamond 10800 series of
primary, backup functionality, 105
switches, 206
removing, 116
POST
saving configurations, 105
BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches, 235
MSM, G8X module, 104
BlackDiamond 8810, 235
MSM-1 module, 205
power cable
MSM-1XL module, 205
AC power supply units, 64
MSM-5 module, 136
DC power supply units, 68
MSM-5R module, 136
replacing, 33
requirements, 33
N specifications, 33
network interface connections, making, 31 Power over Ethernet. See PoE
note icon, 12 power requirements, 32

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 290


Index

PoE devices, 33 re-crating, BlackDiamond 8810, 100–102


power cable, 33 red shipping indicator, 185
power supplies, 32 related publications, 12
power socket, BlackDiamond 10800 series of removing XENPAK modules, 249
switches, 184 re-packing, BlackDiamond 8810, 100–102
power supplies requirements, spacing, 21
operating conditions, 65 RF interference
power requirements, 32 patch panel installation, 27
specifications, 63, 73 preventing, 31
power supply problems caused by, 31
external installation, 251 RJ-45 cable, 30
power supply controller RJ-45 connector jackets, 30
description, 233 running cable. See cable, installing
installing, 234
LEDs, 234 S
overview, 233
power supply cords. See power cable safety requirements. See environmental require-
Power Supply Unit (PSU) ments
AC, 700/1200 W, 59 securing the rack, 25
DC power supply units, 67 serial number
power-on self test. See POST BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches, 183
PSU fan controller BlackDiamond 12804 switch, 131
BlackDiamond 12804 switch BlackDiamond 8806 switch, 89
installing, 174 BlackDiamond 8810 switch, 93
removing, 172 service access to the rack, 25
BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches shipping indicators
installing, 174 BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches
removing, 172 shock watch, 185
tilt watch, 185
R BlackDiamond 8810
shock watch, 94
rack installation tilt watch, 94
mid-mount good state, 94, 185
BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches, red state, 94, 185
193 warning state, 94, 185
BlackDiamond 12804 switch, 164 white state, 94, 185
BlackDiamond 8806 switch, 164 shock watch
BlackDiamond 8810 switch, 97 BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches, 185
standard mount BlackDiamond 8810, 94
BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches, site planning process, 18
191 slot information, BlackDiamond 10800 series of
BlackDiamond 12804 switch, 156 switches, 225
BlackDiamond 8806 switch, 156 slots, BlackDiamond 8800 series of switches
BlackDiamond 8810 switch, 98 MSM, 105
Summit X450 switch, 243 small form pluggable GBIC. See Mini-GBIC
rack mounting. See rack installation space requirements, rack, 25
rack specifications specifications
grounding, 24 AC power supply units, 62
mechanical recommendations, 24 BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches, 273
mounting holes, 24 BlackDiamond 8810 switch, 276, 279
securing to floor, 25 DC power supply units, 73
space requirements, 25 mini-GBICs, 45–46, 47
standards, 24 power cable, 33
radio frequency interference. See RF interference power supplies, 63, 73

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 291


Index

Summit X450 switch, 283 es, 119


SR XENPAK, 51, 245 I/O modules, BlackDiamond 10800 series of
standards switches, 223
cabling, 26, 35 mid-mount rack installation, BlackDiamond
commercial building, 35 10800 series of switches, 184
grounding, 35 mid-mount rack installation, BlackDiamond
Stromstärke, Berechnung, 269 8810, 96
Summit X450 switch MSM, BlackDiamond 10800 series of switch-
chassis es, 208, 253
front view, 240 power supplies, 234
rear view, 241 standard rack mount, 184
desktop mounting, 244 Summit XGM-2xn card, 246
features, 239 tools for removing equipment
free standing, 244 BlackDiamond 8810 AC power cord retaining
installing, 243 bracket, 123
LEDs, 242 fan tray, BlackDiamond 10800 series of
mini-GBICS, 44, 239 switches, 230
mini-GBICs, 44 fan tray, BlackDiamond 8800 series of switch-
troubleshooting, 49 es, 119
removing, 244 I/O modules, BlackDiamond, 226
specifications, 283 MSM, BlackDiamond, 211
switch power supplies, 234
architecture, 239 transition time, UPS, 34, 262
XENCARD, XGM-2xn Card, 246 troubleshooting
XENPAK modules, 245 BlackDiamond 8806 MSM, 246
installing, 248 chassis overheating, BlackDiamond 10800 se-
removing, 249 ries of switches, 223
switch configuration, saving, 105, 134, 207 external memory card, installing, 57
switch spacing requirements, 21 mini-GBIC LEDs, 48
switch, initial login, 39 mini-GBIC removal, 49
SX mini-GBIC over-current conditions, 63
optical system budget, 45 power, turning off, 63
specifications, 45 RF interference, 31

T U
technical specifications Übergangszeit, UPS, 269
BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches, 273 uninterruptible power supply. See UPS
BlackDiamond 8810, 276, 279 unshielded twisted pair. See UTP
Summit X450 switch, 283 UPS
temperature, wiring closet, 20 amperage requirements, calculating, 34, 262
text conventions, 12 Anforderungen an die Stromstärke, Berech-
tilt watch nung, 269
BlackDiamond 10800 series of switches, 185 description, 33
BlackDiamond 8810, 94 features, 34, 262
tools for installing equipment selecting, 34
BlackDiamond 8810 AC power cord retaining size, determining, 34
bracket, 123 transition time, 34, 262
blank front panel, BlackDiamond 10800 se- UPS-
ries of switches, 227 Merkmale, 269
external memory card, 56 Übergangszeit, 269
fan tray, BlackDiamond 10800 series of UTP, 27
switches, 231, 232 UTP cable
fan tray, BlackDiamond 8800 series of switch- bend radius, 27

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 292


Index

category 5, 27
discharge ESD, 27
RF interference, 31

V
verifying the installation, 235

W
warning icon, 12
white shipping indicator, 185
wiring closet
airflow requirements, 21
electrostatic discharge, 23
floor coverings, 20
grounding, 20
humidity, 23
rack, securing, 25
temperature, 20
wiring terminals, 24

X
XENPAK module
description, 54
ER XENPAK, 51
Extreme Networks approved, 54
hot-swapping, 54
installing, 55
LR XENPAK, 51
LRM-LR XENPAK, 53
LX4 XENPAK, 52
removing, 55
securing to I/O module, 55
SR XENPAK, 51
Summit X450, 245
ZR XENPAK, 52
XM-2X module, 141
XM-2XR module, 141

Z
ZR XENPAK, 52, 245
ZX mini-GBIC, specifications, 46

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 293


Index

Extreme Networks Consolidated ExtremeXOS Hardware Installation Guide 294

Anda mungkin juga menyukai